Fiat - Duceto - Owners Manual - 2014 - 2014

2014 FIAT 500 2014 OWNER’S MANUAL Chrysler Group LLC 14FF500-126-AC Third Edition Rev 1 Printed in U.S.A. FIAT 500 VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. WARNING! Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. FIAT is a registered trademark of Fiat Group Marketing & Corporate Communication S. p. A. , used under license by Chrysler Group LLC. Copyright © 2013 Chrysler Group LLC SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 3 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 4 5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 5 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 6 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 7 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 8 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 9 10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 10 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS 䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .7 䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .8 䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 1 4 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION The enclosed Warranty Information lists the services that FIAT Group Automobiles offers to its customers: Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinc- • The Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for tive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are maintaining its validity traditional to our vehicles. • The range of additional services available to FIAT This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assisGroup Automobiles customers tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencIt is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various ing and remain with the vehicle when sold. customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- When it comes to service, remember that your authorized tions and recommendations in this manual will help dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techniassure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. cians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfaction. INTRODUCTION 5 The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains a complete listing of all subjects. contains the information you desire. Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and this Owner’s Manual: HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment. 1 6 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 1 This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through the windshield. This number also appears engraved on the right front door sill under the sill scuff plate, on an adhesive label applied to the right door opening on the B-Pillar, on the vehicle registration and title. Vehicle Identification Number 8 INTRODUCTION VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS WARNING! Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Stamped VIN Location NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 CONTENTS 䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 ▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 ▫ Locking Doors With A Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 ▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 ▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 ▫ Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 ▫ Opening Power Top Remote Function . . . . . . .16 ▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .18 ▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 ▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .22 ▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .16 䡵 POWER WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Power Window Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .34 ▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .35 ▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 ▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . .41 ▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .45 ▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 ▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 ▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 ▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .77 ▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 ▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 ▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 ▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 ▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 ▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .39 ▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 The vehicle is supplied with a code card containing key The key fob contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) code numbers to order duplicate keys, and the authotransmitter with an integrated key. To use the mechanical rized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can key simply press the mechanical key release button. be used to order duplicate keys. A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Ignition Key Removal 1. Place the shift lever in PARK (if equipped with an automatic transmission). 2. Rotate the key to the OFF/LOCK position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder. Mechanical Key Release Button 2 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Ignition Switch Positions 1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK) 2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) 3 — AVV (START) • Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK and remove the Key Fob from the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 WARNING! (Continued) • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. Key-In-Ignition Reminder Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF/LOCK, sounds a signal to remove the key. SENTRY KEY® CAUTION! An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. Locking Doors With A Key You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the door, turn the key to the left. To unlock the door, turn the key to the right. Refer to “Body Lubrication” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for maintenance procedures. The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. 2 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also Replacement Keys considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle. vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is turned a Sentry Key® has been programmed to a vehicle, it to the ON/RUN position, it indicates that there is a cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. problem with the electronics. At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided CAUTION! • Always remove the Sentry Key® from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. • The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection. All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics. with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). This PIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one which has never been programmed. NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 General Information REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF EQUIPPED The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15 This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitsubject to the following conditions: ter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at • This device may not cause harmful interference. the vehicle to activate the system. • This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter With Mechanical Key Release Button 2 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked Opening Power Top Remote Function with metal objects. The remote keyless power top function can only be used with the engine off. To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice, within five seconds, to unlock all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on. Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the Key Fob current setting, refer to “Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your In- NOTE: The remote keyless power top function can be used to open the power top to the spoiler position. strument Panel” for further information. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Opening Power Top Remote Function: WARNING! (Continued) 1. OPEN — Push and hold the unlock button down on the key fob for a minimum of three seconds to initiate Power Top Open. The roof will stop opening whenever the unlock button on the key fob is released, or when it reaches the spoiler position NOTE: If your power convertible top does not open with the remote, please refer to the ⬙Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for additional information. WARNING! Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you: (Continued) • Before operating the power top, make sure that no moving parts of the convertible top can injure a person or animal. • Never place any extremities (hands, feet, etc.) near the convertible top components, the upper windshield area, the shelf area behind the rear seats, or the convertible top stowage area while raising or lowering the convertible top. • When using the power top button on RKE transmitter, if potential danger exists while lowering the top, release the button immediately to interrupt the operation. • Only drive the vehicle with the convertible top completely closed and latched or fully lowered into its stowage compartment. • Do not operate the power top when the vehicle is in motion. 2 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal. Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key® “Customer Key Programming”. If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter, contact your authorized dealer for details. Transmitter Battery Replacement Mechanical Key Release Button NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may ap- 2. Rotate the screw located on the side of the Key Fob ply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate using a small screwdriver. The recommended replacement battery is CR2032. 1. Press the mechanical key release button and release the mechanical key to access the battery case screw located on the side of the Key Fob. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 2 Key Fob Screw Location Battery Case Removed 3. Take out the battery case. Remove and replace the 4. Refit the battery case inside the Key Fob and turn the battery observing its polarity. screw to lock it into place. 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the DOOR LOCKS following conditions: The door locks can be manually locked or unlocked from • This device may not cause harmful interference. inside the vehicle by using the door handle. If the door • This device must accept any interference received, handle is pushed a red lock indicator will show on the including interference that may cause undesired op- door handle (indicating locked) when the door is closed, the door will lock. eration. General Information NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance, check for these two conditions: 1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 WARNING! (Continued) Driver’s Door Lock Handle WARNING! • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. (Continued) • For personal security and safety in the event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle. • Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the Key Fob from the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. 2 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. NOTE: To prevent the key from being locked in the vehicle, the doors will automatically unlock if the driver’s door handle is pushed when the key is in the ignition. CAUTION! An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves. Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. Power Door Locks — If Equipped A power door lock switch is incorporated into the driver door handle. Push or pull the handle to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate. If the driver’s door handle is pushed a red lock indicator will show on the driver’s door handle (indicating locked) when the door is closed, the door will lock. Driver’s Power Door Lock Handle THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically owner manual on your DVD for further information. when the vehicles speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). Autoclose To change the setting proceed as follows: POWER WINDOWS 1. Briefly press the MENU button to enter the MENU Power Window Switches screen. There are single window controls located on the shifter or DOWN button to highlight bezel, below the climate controls, which operate the 2. Press the UP “Autoclose”. Press the MENU button, use the UP driver and passenger door windows. The window conor DOWN buttons to turn setting ON or OFF trols will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position. 3. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approxiWARNING! mately one second) to go back to the main screen Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do without storing the settings. not let children play with power windows. Do not NOTE: Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accorleave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a dance with local laws. (Continued) 2 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) location accessible to children. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. Power Window Switches Auto-Down The driver’s door window switch has an Auto-Down feature. Press the window switch for approximately one THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 second, release, and the window will go down automati- To open the liftgate, squeeze the liftgate release handle cally. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion. switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch. Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window. LIFTGATE To unlock the liftgate, use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or activate the power door lock switches located on the driver door handle. Liftgate Handle 2 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle. • If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do not use the recirculation mode. OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems: • Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating positions • Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger • Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) for the driver and passengers seated next to a window NOTE: Gas props support the liftgate in the open position. However, because the gas pressure drops with • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when • Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants opening the liftgate in cold weather. • Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 • All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include 1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the buckled up in a rear seat. seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the WARNING! desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large • Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an item in a seat — if equipped air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Please pay close attention to the information in this Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 section. It tells you how to use your restraint system years or younger, including a child in a rearward properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as facing infant seat. possible. • Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for Children (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems. For more information on LATCH, refer to “LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children).” Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow risk of harm from a deploying air bag: 2 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. 2. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly. 3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate. 4. Do not lean against the door or window. Your vehicle has Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) or Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB), and when deployment occurs, the SABIC and SAB air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door. 5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in ⬙If You Need Consumer Assistance.⬙ WARNING! • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags. • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 WARNING! (Continued) • Side air bags also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat. • In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly. from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. Lap/Shoulder Belts All the seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with combination lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even normal conditions. However in a collision, the belt will on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen vehicle or being thrown out. far away from home or on your own street. Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown 2 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body. These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best. • Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. • Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size. (Continued) Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat. 2. The seat belt latch plate is along side the pillar near the back of your seat. Grasp the latch plate and pull out THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap. 2 Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Pulling Out The Latch Plate 3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you. • A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. • A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. (Continued) 4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 WARNING! • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug. • A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed. Positioning Lap Belt 5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt. 2 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi- Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the shoulder belt. webbing to allow the belt to retract fully. 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point. WARNING! A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). 2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate. 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate. 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) which are used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position. First Row Second Row Driver N/A ALR Passenger ALR ALR Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If Equipped In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail• N/A — Not Applicable able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode If the passenger seating position is equipped with an anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating ALR and is being used for normal usage: 2 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat. How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted. WARNING! • The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual. • Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions. 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is Energy Management Feature now in the Automatic Locking Mode. This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it collision. to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This locking mode. feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 Seat Belt Pretensioners Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System The seat belts for both front seating positions are (BeltAlert®) equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. front passenger (if equipped with front passenger These devices may improve the performance of the seat BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occu- passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are pants, including those in child restraints. fastened. NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt worn snugly and positioned properly. Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant ReOnce the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretenduration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened. sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately. Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is 2 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph Seat Belt Extender (8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and notification. when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the extender should be used only if the existing belt is not front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if long enough. When it is not required, remove the exequipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in tender and store it. the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed. WARNING! BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer. FIAT Group Automobiles does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert®. NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened. Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not needed. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts panel below the steering column. throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe. Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision. Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the 1 — Driver And Passenger Ad- 3 — Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag/Knee Bolster instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The vanced Front Air Bags 2 — Knee Bolster words AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers. In 2 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC Bags are certified to new Federal regulations for Ad- are located between the side windows. The trim covering the SABIC is labeled AIRBAG. vanced Air Bags. The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to allow the This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seatair bags to have different inflation levels based on several Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB). The SAB are marked with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front factors, including the severity and type of collision. seats. This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the NOTE: inflation level of the Advanced Front Air Bags based • Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, upon seat position. but they will open during air bag deployment. This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately. the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation level of Air Bag System Components the Advanced Front Air Bags. Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag system components: Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front, • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 • Air Bag Warning Light Advanced Front Air Bag Features • Steering Wheel and Column The Advanced Front Air Bag system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors. • Instrument Panel • Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag • Knee Impact Bolsters • Driver Advanced Front Air Bag • Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) • Front and Side Impact Sensors • Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch, and Seat Track Position Sensors WARNING! • No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel, because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate. (Continued) 2 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. • Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way. • Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) Label When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) provide deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air side impact. The SAB are marked with an air bag label bag only. sewn into the outboard side of the front seats. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) may offer side-impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each air bag features inflated chambers, placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant, that reduce the potential for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side. 2 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label Location NOTE: Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) and SABIC during impacts that require air bag occupant protection. SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Occupants, including children who are up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially children, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint. Always sit upright as possible with your back against the seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. WARNING! • Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC. The area where the SABIC is located should remain free from any obstructions. • Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side air bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury. (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING! (Continued) • Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason. • Do not allow occupants to extend any part of their body outside of the window. Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags. Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front Air Bags and the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag work with the knee impact bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system enhanced protection and works together with the Driver required for this vehicle. Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact. The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic 2 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag, Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB), and front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on several factors, including the severity and type of impact. Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on several factors, including the severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear or side collisions. underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration. The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision. Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed. Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver away from an inflating air bag. Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 ON/RUN or START position. If the key is in the OFF/ noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnosLOCK position, or not in the ignition, the air bag system tics also record the nature of the malfunction. is not on and the air bags will not inflate. The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. WARNING! Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition is first turned on. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily Inflator Units or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag comes on again after initial startup. Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru- wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel. ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large 2 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates are possible, based on several factors, including the collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover separates and folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the full size. The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20 milliseconds. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB) Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are designed to activate only in certain side collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle. collision. Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air Unit bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is triggered, releasing a large quantity of non-toxic gas. The located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflates in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This especially applies to children. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may deploy the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), depending on the severity and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle. covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag inflates. This especially applies to children. The side curtain air bag is about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated. Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed. Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side events. curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and 2 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Enhanced Accident Response System • Unlock the doors automatically. In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions: After the event occurs, when the system is active, the message ⬙Fuel Cutoff See Handbook⬙ is displayed. • Cut off fuel to the engine. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. System Reset Procedure • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or After an impact causing air bag deployment, the left and until the ignition key is turned off. right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as cluster, will both be blinking, until the ignition is turned the battery has power or until the ignition key is off. In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road removed. you must follow the system reset procedure. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Customer Action 1. Turn ignition OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State). 2. Turn ignition ON. 3. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON. 4. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON. 5. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON. 6. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON. 7. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State). 8. Turn ignition OFF. 9. Turn Hazard Flashers OFF (Manually). Customer Will See 2 Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light BLINKS. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light BLINKS. Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light BLINKS. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light BLINKS. Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light is OFF. System is now reset and the engine may be started. 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE If a reset procedure step is not completed within 45 seconds, then the turn signal lights will turn off and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to be successful. If A Deployment Occurs floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately. • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye the air bag system. irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on or all of the following may occur: your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause structions for cleaning. abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have defront passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those bags will not be in place to protect you. you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 WARNING! Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well. Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING! 2 • Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards. • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system. (Continued) 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer. Air Bag Warning Light You will want to have the air bags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision. The Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position. • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval. • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check the Body Control Module (BCM) fuse block inside the vehicle for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good. • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, • How fast the vehicle was traveling. Event Data Recorder (EDR) These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. 2 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front. There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child Child Restraints seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the times, including babies and children. Every state in the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s United States, and every Canadian province, requires Manual and on all the labels attached to the car seat. that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 NOTE: • For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: • http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedriverschildsafety-index-53.htm WARNING! In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. 2 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Infants and Toddlers Small Children Larger Children Children Too Large for Child Restraints Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint Children who are at least two years old or who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint Children who have out-grown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardfacing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat. WARNING! • Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearward facing infant seat. • Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who 2 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat. All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt. WARNING! • Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. • After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 WARNING! (Continued) • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury. Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone: 1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat? 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way back? 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between their neck and arm? 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach? 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip? 2 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly. WARNING! Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Weight of the Child + Child Restraint Rear-Facing Child Restraint Rear-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below LATCH – LATCH – Lower Anchors Seat Belt + Top Lower Anchors Seat Belt Only + Top Tether Tether Anchor Only Anchor X X X X X X 2 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH) Restraint System Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle • • Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 2 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint? 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint? Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages? Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage? No Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint. N/A No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat? Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information. Locating The LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion. LATCH Anchorages 2 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Locating The LATCH Anchorages There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat. LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. Center Seat LATCH WARNING! This vehicle does not have a center seating position. Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to install a child seat in the center of the back seat. Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here. To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint 1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt following the instructions below. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating position has. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the 5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direceasily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle tions to attach a tether anchor. anchorages. 3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for 6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack that seating position. For some second row seats, you in the straps according to the child restraint manufacmay need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved turer’s instructions. forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to 7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by move it to its rear-most position to make room for the pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt child seat. You may also move the front seat forward path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) to allow more room for the child seat. in any direction. 4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seatWhen using the LATCH attaching system to install a ing position. child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play 2 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them. WARNING! • Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. • Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child Restraints in this Vehicle The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.” 2 • ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor • Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint? Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat? Weight limit of the Child Restraint Can the head restraints be removed? Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint? Yes No Yes Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint. Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. Yes, all may be moved Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing 1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing position. For some second row seats, you may need to retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode. better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out any webrear-most position to make room for the child seat. bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat. 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to the child restraint rearward and downward into the pass it through the seat belt path of the child restraint. Do vehicle seat. not twist the belt webbing in the seat belt path. Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect “click”. the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat. 2 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor. rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the car seat. 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by 2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) path. in any direction. Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. “click”. Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped 4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the 1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating vehicle seat. position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a 5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. Refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt restraint installation tight, try a different seating position. path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm) in Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether any direction. Anchorage Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the 1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the You may need to move the seat forward to provide belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, discontether anchorage for that seating position, move the nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert is available. the latch plate into the buckle with the release button 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraint. restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the route the tether strap under the head restraint and buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate 2 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head 4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard restraint manufacturer’s instructions. side of the head restraint. 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram. Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting WARNING! • An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. • If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detriAn unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly mental and should be avoided. injured, or could injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision. The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintenance ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle. Transporting Pets CAUTION! Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result. 2 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as a problem. SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA. WARNING! (Continued) • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Exhaust Gas WARNING! • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. (Continued) WARNING! Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 WARNING! (Continued) • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/ rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. system. 2 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt. feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable. Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they The light should come on and remain on for cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your authorized WARNING! dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious perdealer. sonal injury. Defroster • Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners. Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to Air Bag Warning Light (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle. • Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals. • Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning. • Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control. • If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory. Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle. (Continued) 2 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear panel. patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts Door Latches and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges. Check for positive closing, latching, and locking. Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires Fluid Leaks (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure. Tires Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 䡵 POWER CONVERTIBLE TOP — IF EQUIPPED . .86 ▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .93 ▫ Lowering The Power Top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 ▫ Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 ▫ Raising The Power Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 䡵 BLUE&ME™ HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 ▫ Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure . . . . .88 ▫ Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 ▫ Wind Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 ▫ The Hands-Free Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 ▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 ▫ Front Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment . . .102 ▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .90 ▫ Recline Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 ▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 ▫ Seat Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 ▫ Folding Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 3 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ EZ Entry Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 ▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 ▫ Memory Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 ▫ Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . .113 ▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 ▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 ▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 ▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .115 䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .109 䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .116 䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 ▫ Front Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . .116 ▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 ▫ Rear Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 ▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 䡵 TILT STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . .119 ▫ High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . .120 ▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 ▫ Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 ▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 ▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .112 ▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 ▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 ▫ Emergency Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 䡵 REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .124 ▫ Sun Shade — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 ▫ Rear Park Assist Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .133 ▫ Rear Park Assist Alerts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 䡵 CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .135 ▫ Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 ▫ Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System . . . . . . .127 䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 ▫ Park Assist System Usage Precautions . . . . . . .127 ▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .130 䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 ▫ To Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 ▫ To Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 ▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 ▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 3 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE POWER CONVERTIBLE TOP — IF EQUIPPED NOTE: On vehicles equipped with a power convertible top, the • The power top buttons will operate when the ignition power convertible top switch is located on the overhead switch is turned to the ACC/ON/RUN position. console. The switch contains two buttons. The passenger side button, is used to open the power top, and the driver • The power top can be remotely operated with the key fob. Refer to “Opening Power Top Remote Function” side button, is used to close the power top. in “Things To Know Before Starting” for more information. Lowering The Power Top Auto Open Push the top open button approximately one second for the three-quarter open/spoiler position. Push the top open button for approximately one second a second time to fully open the convertible top. Manual Open Power Convertible Top Switch For manual open, push and hold the open button until desired roof position or until spoiler position. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 NOTE: Vertical movement only operates in auto open/ NOTE: Rail lubrication is recommended every 2000 cycles, or if scratching noises due to dust are present. close mode. Refer to “Fluids, Lubes, and Genuine Part” in “MaintainRaising The Power Top ing Your Vehicle” for information. Auto Close From the convertible top fully open position, push the top close button for approximately one second for the three-quarter open/spoiler position. Push the top close button for approximately one second a second time for the one-quarter open position. Push and hold close button to fully close convertible top. Manual Close For manual close, push and hold the close button until desired position until one-quarter open position. Push and hold again for full close position. CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mildew on the top material: • Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force water past the weather strips. • Remove any standing water from the top and dry the surface before opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior. (Continued) 3 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! (Continued) • Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure directed at the weather strip seals may cause water to leak into the vehicle’s interior. WARNING! The convertible top does not provide the structural protection that a reinforced metal roof does and the fabric top cannot be expected to prevent the ejection of the occupants in a collision. Therefore, it is important that all occupants wear their seat belts at all times. Death or serious injuries could occur if you are ejected from the vehicle during a collision. Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure If your power convertible top does not operate in the Auto Opening/Closing mode (automatically opening/ closing to the one-quarter open and three-quarter open comfort stops), or if the remote keyless power top function is inoperable, or if the trunk lid does not open the following relearn procedure may be necessary. 1. Confirm that the door/trunk lid are closed. 2. Begin with the top in the fully closed position (using manual mode). 3. Hold the OPEN button to move the top to the fully open position. 4. CONTINUE to hold the OPEN button for an additional three seconds. 5. Release the OPEN button. 6. Hold the CLOSED button to move the top to the fully closed position. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 7. CONTINUE to hold the CLOSED button until the top Wind Stop begins to cycle fully open, then release the CLOSED The Wind Stop installs in the backseat area of the vehicle. button. The Wind Stop will not interfere with power top operaAt the end of step 7 the top will automatically cycle to the tion. Therefore, it can remain installed when the top is up. fully open position, and then close to the 1/4 open MIRRORS position. This will confirm that the relearn procedure was success- Inside Day/Night Mirror ful. The mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for Auto Open/Close will now be functional. Trunk lid various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center operation will be functional. Remote Keyless Power Top on the view through the rear window. Function will be functional. Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night NOTE: DO NOT interrupt this activity. position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror If the power convertible top does not relearn repeat the should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward procedure a second time. the windshield). 3 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate. NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse. Adjusting Rearview Mirror UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 Power Mirrors The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s door trim panel. 3 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION! To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. Power Mirror Switches 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The power mirror controls consist of a mirror select switch and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror, press the mirror select switch to either the L (left) or R (right) to select the mirror you need to adjust. Spotter Mirror — If Equipped Some models are equipped with a driver’s side spotter mirror. The spotter mirror allows for a greater range of visibility on the driver’s side of the vehicle. Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move. WARNING! Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror. Spotter Mirror UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 Folding Mirrors The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The mirror has three detent positions: full forward, normal and full rearward. 3 Heated Mirrors — If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. Sun Visors The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the headliner, near the front windshield. The sun visor can be rotated downward or up against the door glass. Both sun visors are equipped with courtesy mirrors. Sun Visor (Passenger Side Shown) 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE you are not required to train the voice recognition system to recognize your voice. This implies that the system is nearly equally performing with different persons, i.e.: the Overview voice recognition system is of the “speaker independent” Windows Mobile™-based FIAT BLUE&ME™ is a per- type. sonal telematic system enabling you to use communicaWith this system you can also play your favorite music tion and entertainment applications expressly designed stored on USB device and select tracks and playback for use in the car. modes with both voice commands or buttons on the The BLUE&ME™ system installed on your car is steering wheel. equipped with a hands-free kit, message reader and This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules media player, and it is preset for future installation of subject to the following two conditions: additional services. • This device may not cause harmful interference. The BLUE&ME™ system, fully integrated with voice commands, buttons on the steering wheel and multifunc- • This device must accept all interference received, intion display messages, gives you the possibility of intercluding interference that may cause undesired operaacting with your Bluetooth® wireless technology mobile tion. phone (even if you keep it in your pocket or bag) without having to take your eyes off the road or remove your hands from the steering wheel. To use voice commands BLUE&ME™ HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION — IF EQUIPPED UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 your mobile phone manually and visually using the steering wheel controls and the instrument panel multiThe basic characteristic of this hands-free kit is voice function display. recognition with Bluetooth® wireless technology. With this system you can make and receive calls safely and securely by using either voice commands or buttons on the steering wheel. This can be done under any driving condition without ever having to take your eyes off the road or remove your hands from the steering wheel, as required by current laws. The Hands-Free Kit Bluetooth® wireless technology enables wireless connection between your mobile phone and the hands-free kit installed on your car. To use the hands-free kit, you need a Bluetooth® wireless technology enabled mobile phone. This hands-free kit gives you the possibility of interacting vocally with your 1 — Mute/ESC mobile phone while driving, even if your mobile device 2 — Phone/Main does not feature this capability. You can also interact with 3 — Phone Hang Up 4 — Voice Recognition (VR) 3 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To get started with BLUE&ME™ hands-free kit with • To interact with BLUE&ME™ you can use either the voice recognition, you have to simply pair your buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands. With voice recognition, you can perform system funcBluetooth® wireless technology enabled mobile phone tions by speaking voice commands, also identified as with the system. “keywords”. When the system recognizes a keyword, Pairing is an operation that has to be made only once. it will respond with the appropriate action. Voice NOTE: recognition is an easy and convenient way to use BLUE&ME™. • During the mobile phone pairing procedure, BLUE&ME™ attempts to detect a phone equipped All the system functions are available within the with Bluetooth® wireless technology within range and BLUE&ME™ Main Menu. When the car is not moving, then establishes the connection using a Personal Iden- you can scroll through the complete menu by using either the buttons on the steering wheel or the voice commands. tification Number (PIN). When you are travelling, you can interact with • Once your phone is paired, you have the option to BLUE&ME™ by using the buttons on the steering wheel transfer your mobile phone contacts to the hands-free or voice commands relevant only to phone functions kit, to make a phone call either by using the contacts (LAST CALLS and PHONEBOOK) and the media player. list or directly pronouncing the phone number, to To activate settings when travelling you can only use answer a call and also to answer another incoming voice commands. phone call. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 • Conference Call — You can call another contact while you are engaged in a phone conversation (with Contact Calling By Voice — You can call a contact in Bluetooth® phones supporting this option). your mobile phone phonebook using your voice. You can also call a contact in your phonebook by scanning • Call Waiting — While engaged in a phone conversathrough the entries on the multifunction display. (To tion, you can receive notification of another incoming use this option you have to transfer your mobile phone phone call, answer the other incoming phone call, and contacts to the hands-free kit phonebook). switch between two ongoing phone conversations. (Call waiting is only supported by a subset of compatDigit Dialing By Voice — You can dial a phone ible mobile phones). number by pushing the VR button on the steering wheel and speaking the digits to be dialed. • Refusing Incoming Call Or Ending A Call — You can refuse an incoming call or end a current call by To Call The SMS Text Sender — Call directly the last pushing the Phone Hang-up button on the steering SMS text sender or the sender of a message received wheel. and stored in the BLUE&ME™ inbox. After pairing and connecting your phone with the To Answer A Call — You can answer an incoming call BLUE&ME™ system, you can make phone calls by by pushing the MAIN/Phone button on the steering speaking keywords or pushing buttons on the steering wheel. The hands-free kit enables the following operations: • • • • 3 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE wheel. When using the hands-free phone, the audio NOTE: Not all mobile phones support the SMS text output of a phone conversation is heard through your car message reader function or automatic phonebook transfer via Bluetooth®. For further information on the list of sound speakers. compatible mobile phones go to http:// Message Reader www.fiatusa.com, find the SUPPORT section near the The BLUE&ME™ message reader enables automatic bottom of web page and click on the Bluetooth® logo. reading, through the car sound system, of the SMS texts Message reader functions are managed by the control you receive on your Bluetooth® wireless technology mobile phone that are received when the phone is paired buttons on the steering wheel or by the BLUE&ME™ voice commands. and connected to the BLUE&ME™ system. It does not provide access to messages that were received before the The BLUE&ME™ message reader enables the following device was connected with the BLUE&ME™ system. The operations: message reader will also interpret any abbreviation and • To display an indicator on the instrument panel that emoticon contained in the SMS text. indicates you have received a new SMS text. It will display the sender’s number/name and will ask you whether to read the text of the message to you. • To manage the list of SMS texts received on your BLUE&ME™ paired mobile phone. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 • To read the messages received and stored. Messages In this way, while you are driving you can play your favorite music collections. can be read multiple times. • To call the SMS text sender using the buttons on the • iPod® Player — See dedicated paragraph under Media Player Functions. steering wheel or voice commands. • To delete individual messages or the entire inbox using The media player enables the following operations: the buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands. • Digital Audio Playback — You can play all your digital audio files (.mp3, .wma, .wav, .aac) or play a customized playlist (.m3u or .wpl format). The BLUE&ME™ system can also recognize and read abbreviations, if any (e.g. “ILUVU” will be read like “I • Audio File Selection By Category — You can play all love you”) and interpret the most usual emoticons (e.g. :-) audio files of a certain category, e.g.: album, artist or will be read like “Smile”), that are currently used to write genre. SMS texts. • Playback Options — While playing tracks you can Media Player select the following options: Play, Stop, Next track, With the BLUE&ME™ media player you can play, the Previous track, Shuffle and Loop track. digital audio files stored on a USB device by simply connecting it to the USB port located in the glove box of the car. 3 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: • The media player does not support audio files compressed with other formats and DRM (Digital Rights Management) protected audio files. Non-supported audio files that may be present on the USB device will be ignored. • To use the media player, you have to simply connect (directly or by an extension lead) your USB device to the car USB port. After turning the ignition key to ON, BLUE&ME™ will start building your media library. At the end of this operation you can surf the complete library and scroll its categories as required using the buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands. BLUE&ME™ will then play your selection via the car sound system. WARNING! • Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, accident and injury. It is strongly recommended that you use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take your focus off the road or your hands off the steering wheel. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. • Read and Follow Instructions: before using your system, read and follow all instructions and safety information provided in this “Owner’s Manual”. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. (Continued) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! • Keep the Owner’s Manual in the car: when kept in the car, the Owner’s Manual will be a ready reference for you and other users unfamiliar with the system. Please make certain that before using the system for the first time, all persons have access to the Owner’s Manual and read its instructions and safety information carefully. • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle. 3 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Front Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor. move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. WARNING! • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. Recline Adjustment The recline adjustment lever is located on the inboard side of the seat. To recline the seatback, lift up the recline While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the lever, lean back until the desired position has been seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the reached, and release the lever. desired position is reached. Then, using body pressure, Adjusting Bar UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Seat Height Adjustment The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pump the lever upward to raise the seat height, or pump the lever downward to lower the seat height. Recline Lever WARNING! Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. Height Adjuster 3 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Lift the seatback upright and push the seat rearward to The driver and front passenger seats have an EZ entry its locked position once the rear passengers are seated. feature for rear seat passengers. Pull forward on the Memory Feature release lever, located on the outboard side of the seatback, Both front seats have a memory feature, which can dump the seatback forward, then slide the seat forward operate in two ways: to allow access in and out of the rear seat. Memory Function Option 1 — Full Seat Back And Track Fore/Aft Position Memory: EZ Entry Feature After using the EZ entry function, the seatback angle and the Track fore/aft adjuster can both re-lock into the position they were most recently adjusted to. This is accomplished if the seat is moved fully rearward to its last fore/aft position on the tracks before the seat back is returned upright. Memory Function Option 2 — Seat Back Only Memory: EZ Entry Lever After using the EZ entry function, the seat back may first be returned upright prior to going back to the last UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 fore/aft (memory) position on the tracks. This results in the seat back memory being set only – The track will then be locked forward of its last set fore/aft memory position. To then reset the fore/aft track memory feature (to reestablish Memory Function Option 1), the seat has to be returned fully rearward to its last fore/aft memory track position as described in Memory Function Option 1. Heated Seats — If Equipped On some models, the front driver and passenger seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are located on the center instrument panel area. Press the switch once to turn on the heated seats. Press the switch a second time to shut the heating elements off. NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes. WARNING! • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. • Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. 3 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Head Restraints Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rearimpact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with Reactive Head Restraints. In the event of a rear impact the Reactive Head Restraints will automatically extend forward minimizing the gap between the back of the occupant’s head and the Reactive Head Restraint. WARNING! The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealership. 3 WARNING! Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death. Push Button The Reactive Head Restraints will automatically return to their normal position following a rear impact. If the Reactive Head Restraints do not return to their normal position, see your authorized dealership immediately. 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Head Restraints To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for information on tether routing. Push Button UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood, two latches must be released. 2. Rotate the safety catch under the front edge of the hood, near the center, and raise the hood. 1. Pull the bottom of the RED hood release lever, located on the left kick panel, rearward. 3 Hood Safety Latch Location Hood Release Lever 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 3. Lift the hood prop rod that clips to the right side (left In hot climates, the prop rod may be hot. Pick up the prop side when standing in front of the hood) of the engine rod at the foam on the end of the prop rod. compartment. Place the hood prop rod in the hole of hood hinge to secure the hood in the open position. WARNING! Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death. CAUTION! Hood Prop Rod To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower the hood until it is open 8 in (20 cm) approximately and then drop it. This should secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever, located on the left side of the steering wheel, controls the operation of the headlights, headlight beam selection, passing light and turn signals. 3 NOTE: The external lights can only be turned on with the ignition in the ON/RUN position. Headlights Rotate the end of the multifunction lever upward to the first detent for headlight operation. Headlight Operation NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime Running Lights will be deactivated. 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE High Beams Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate the With the low beams activated, push the multi- end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol. function lever towards the instrument panel to NOTE: The low beams and side/taillights will not be on turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever with DRL. toward the steering wheel to turn off the high beams. If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was Flash-To-Pass purchased the DRL function can be turned on or off using You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by the display menus. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informapartially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer- tion Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to Panel” for further information. turn on until the lever is released. Turn Signals Parking Lights Push the multifunction lever upward to signal a right turn or downward to signal a left turn. The correspondTo turn on the parking lights, remove the key ing indicator in the instrument cluster will blink to or turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK position and indicate the operation of the turn signal. turn on the headlights. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off. Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for a preset period of time. Activation Remove the key or turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position, and pull the multifunction lever toward the Turn Signal Operation steering wheel, within two minutes. Each time the lever NOTE: The indicators will automatically turn off when is pulled, the activation of the lights will be extended by the turn has been completed and the steering wheel is 30 seconds. The activation of the lights can be extended to returned to a straight position. a maximum of 210 seconds. 3 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Deactivation Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel and hold it for more than two seconds. on the right light and press the switch to the left to turn on the left light. CAUTION! Interior Lights Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the The interior light switches are located in the overhead switch is in the center position or that the lights are console. The interior lights can be set to three different off to avoid draining the battery. positions (Off/Left Position, Center Position, On/Right Position). Interior Light Timing (Center Position) Using the switch on the left overhead, press the switch to the right from its center position and the lights are always on. Press the switch to the left from its center position and the lights are always off. Leave the switch in the center position, and the lights are turned on and off when the doors are opened or closed. The switch on the right side of the overhead console controls the map or reading function of the lights. Press the switch to the right to turn There are four different modes of operation that can be activated in this position: • When one door is opened a three minute timer is activated. • When the key is removed from the ignition (within two minutes of the ignition being turned off), a 10 second timer is activated. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 • When the doors are unlocked with the Key Fob a 10 second timer is activated. • When the doors are locked with the Key Fob the lights will turn off. 3 Interior Light Timing (On/Right Position) • When all doors are closed a 15 minute timer is activated. NOTE: The timer is deactivated when the key is moved into the ON/RUN position. Front Fog Lights — If Equipped Fog Light Switch Press the switch once to turn the front fog lights on. Press The fog light switch is located on the center stack of the the switch a second time to turn the front fog lights off. instrument panel, just below the radio. 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the right side of the steering column. NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only operate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position. Front Windshield Wiper Operation There are five different modes of operation for the front windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever can be raised or lowered to access these modes: Windshield Wiper Operation Windshield Wiper Off This is the normal position of the wiper lever. Intermittent Wiper Operation Push the lever downward to the first detent. The wipers will operate intermittently. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 NOTE: The Intermittent function only has one detent Front Windshield Washer Operation but wiper delay will vary with changes in vehicle speed. Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the As vehicle speed increases the delay time will decrease. steering wheel to activate the washers. The wipers will activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is Low Speed released. Push the lever downward to the second detent. The wipers will operate at low speed. CAUTION! High Speed Push the lever downward to the third detent. The wipers will operate at high speed. Manual High Speed/Mist Push the lever upward from the off position. The wipers will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. This operation will continue until the lever is released. When the lever is released, the wipers will return to the off position and automatically shut off. • Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off. • In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” position before turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted. (Continued) 3 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! (Continued) • Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position. If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage to the wiper motor may occur. Rear Windshield Wiper Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer lever upward to the first detent past the intermittent settings for intermittent wipe operation. With the front windRear Wiper Operation shield wiper active, rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer lever upward. The rear wiper will operate NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only operin the same mode as the front windshield wipers, but at ate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position. half the frequency. When the transmission is shifted into REVERSE, the rear wiper will automatically operate at Low Speed and return to normal operation when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Rear Windshield Washer Operation Push the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the instrument panel to activate the rear washer. Push and hold the lever for more than a half second and the wipers will activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is released. 3 TILT STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. The tilt control lever is located on the left-side of the steering column, below the turn signal controls. Tilt Control Lever Push down on the lever to unlock the column. With one hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the steering column up or down as desired. Push the lever up to lock the column firmly in place. 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h). The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel. Electronic Speed Control Buttons UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed. WARNING! Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it. To Activate To Set A Desired Speed Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use. Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET (-) button. 3 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To Deactivate The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units: A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will U.S. Speed (mph) deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the • Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed button results in an increase of 1 mph. memory. • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will To Resume Speed continue to increase until the button is released, then To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) the new set speed will be established. button and release. Resume can be used at any speed Metric Speed (km/h) above 25 mph (40 km/h). • Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a To Vary The Speed Setting 2 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of To Increase Speed the button results in an increase of 2 km/h. When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in- • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can dethe new set speed will be established. crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button. The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed To Accelerate For Passing To Decrease Speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units: U.S. Speed (mph) Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills • Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed. button results in a decrease of 1 mph. • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains continue to decrease until the button is released, then speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. the new set speed will be established. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed • Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 2 km/h Control. decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 2 km/h. Metric Speed (km/h) 3 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery. REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED The Rear Park Assist system provides an audible indication of the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to the “Park Assist System Usage Precautions” for the limitations of this system and recommendations. Rear Park Assist is automatically activated when the transmission is placed into REVERSE. As the distance from an obstacle behind the vehicle decreases, the audible alert becomes more frequent. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Rear Park Assist Sensors Rear Park Assist Alerts The four Rear Park Assist sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles, in the horizontal direction, from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 55 in (140 cm) from the center of the rear fascia/bumper and up to 24 in (60 cm) from the corners of the rear fascia/bumper, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle. If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when REVERSE gear is engaged, an audible alert is activated. The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses between the tones are directly proportional to the distance from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succession indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is less than 12 If several obstacles are detected, the Rear Park Assist in (30 cm) away. system indicates the nearest obstacle. The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corresponds to the maximum height of an obstacle that would clear the underside of the car during the parking maneuver. 3 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Rear Park Assist System SIGNAL Obstacle Distance MEANING An obstacle is present within the sensors’ field of view Failure Sensor or System failures INDICATION Audible signal (dashboard loudspeaker) • Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases as the distance decreases. • Emits continuous tone at 12 in (30 cm). • Adjustable volume level. (Refer to “Menu Functions” for further information). Visual Signal (instrument panel) • Icon appears on display. • Message is displayed on multifunction display (where provided). While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is not condition occurs for the external sensors, the signal is turned off after 3 seconds (stopping warnings during muted. maneuvers parallel to walls). The audible signal is turned off immediately if the distance increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the distance measured by the inner sensors is constant. If this UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 to the sensor in failure condition. If even a single sensor fails, the entire system must be disabled. The system is A malfunction of the Rear Park Assist sensors or system turned off automatically. is indicated, during REVERSE gear engagement, by the instrument panel warning icon and message displayed Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash display. soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In The warning icon is illuminated and a message washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vais displayed on the EVIC display (if equipped). por jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 in Refer to ⬙Electronic Vehicle Information Center (10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the (EVIC)⬙ in “Understanding Your Instrument sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors. Panel” for further information. Park Assist System Usage Precautions The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Failures are indi- NOTE: cated immediately if they occur when the system is ON. • Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor or other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist is in failure condition, the EVIC shall indicate that the system operating properly. Rear Park Assist system is unavailable, without reference Failure Indications 3 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of Rear Park Assist. • Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The Rear Park Assist system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper. • Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/ bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing a failure indication to be displayed in the instrument cluster. CAUTION! • Rear Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity. • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Rear Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using Rear Park Assist. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Rear Park Assist system. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. • Before using the Rear Park Assist System, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. (Continued) 3 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof roof switch is located in the overhead console. Power Sunroof Switch WARNING! • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. • In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured. • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 To Open Pinch Protect Feature Press and hold the power sunroof switch rearward for approximately one second and the sunroof will stop at the vented position. Press the switch a second time and hold for approximately one second and release, the sunroof will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and release to Express Close. Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the With the sunroof in the full open position, pull the power ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the sunroof button and hold it for approximately one second, windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain the sunroof will return to the vented position. Pull the open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurswitch a second time and hold for approximately one rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with second to completely close the sunroof. the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window. To Close 3 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Emergency Operation In case of electrical failure the sunroof can be operated with the hex wrench that is located in the glove box. There is a plug located in the rear of the sunroof opening at the center of the vehicle. Removing the plug reveals a hex opening in the motor assembly of the sunroof. Insert the hex wrench and turn, moving the sunroof to the desired location. Sun Shade — If Equipped For vehicles equipped with either a power sunroof or a fixed glass roof, there is a sun shade that can be open or closed. To open the sun shade press the tab and move the shade to a full open position. Manual Sun Shade UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Power is available when the ignition switch is in the There is a standard 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet, ON/RUN or START position. Insert the cigar lighter or located in the floor console, for added convenience. This accessory plug into the outlet for use. To preserve the heating element, do not hold the lighter in the heating power outlet can power mobile phones, electronics and position. other low power devices. ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS CAUTION! Power Outlet • Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watts (13 Amps) power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced. • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 3 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! To avoid serious injury or death: • Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. • Do not touch with wet hands. • Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle. • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. Power Outlet Fuse Location Underhood F15 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Front Console UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 CAUTION! • Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with great caution. • After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery. CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED WARNING! When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot. To avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter with care. Always check that the cigar lighter has turned off. 3 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE For rear passengers, there are cupholders located on the For the driver and front passenger, cupholders are lo- floor between the front driver and passenger seats. cated on the floor console between the front seats. CUPHOLDERS Rear Cupholders Front Cupholders UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 STORAGE Glove Compartment The glove compartment is located on the right side of the instrument panel. Pull outward on the glove compartment latch to open the glove compartment. Push the glove compartment door upward to close it. 3 Glove Compartment Latch 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CARGO AREA FEATURES The rear seatbacks have a fold down feature to allow increased cargo capacity. Push down the release button, located at the outboard top of the seatback and move the seatback to its foldeddown position to provide a flat load floor cargo area. When returning the seatback to its upright position, push rearward until the seatback is properly latched. Rear Seat Release Buttons UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located in the center of the instrument panel, below the radio. Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster. An indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes. To manually shut the defroster off, push the button a second time. Folded Rear Seats NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating. 3 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: • Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS 䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .143 ▫ Change Engine Oil Indicator System . . . . . . . .162 䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — POP, LOUNGE, 500C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 ▫ Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — SPORT. . . . . . . . . .145 䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .146 䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 ▫ EVIC Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 ▫ EVIC Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 ▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 ▫ Trip Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 ▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 ▫ Values Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 ▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 䡵 SALES CODE (RAB) RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 ▫ Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 ▫ Suggestions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 4 142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ▫ Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 ▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 ▫ Quick Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 ▫ CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 ▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 ▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone (If Equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 ▫ Functions And Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 ▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 ▫ SiriusXM Satellite Radio — If Equipped. . . . . .194 ▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 ▫ CD MP3 Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 ▫ Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 䡵 iPod®/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . .204 䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .205 䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .206 䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 ▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning . . . . . .207 ▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 ▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 — Side Vent — Multifunction Lever – Light Control — Instrument Cluster And Warning Lights — Windshield Wiper, Washer, Trip Computer — Central Air Vents — Storage Compartment/Radio 7 — Passenger Air Bag 8 — Glove Compartment 9 — Rear Defrost Button 10 — Hazard Button 11 — Climate Controls 12 — Power Windows Control 13 14 15 16 — — — — Storage Compartment Shift Lever Sport Button Horn/Driver Airbag 144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — POP, LOUNGE, 500C UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — SPORT 4 146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1. Glow Plug Light — If Equipped 2. Rear Defrost Indicator This indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster This vehicle will inhibit engine cranking when the automatically turns off after 20 minutes. ambient temperature is less than –22° F (–30° C) and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an CAUTION! engine block heater has not been used. The Glow Plug Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to light will flash during in cold weather for up to 10 the heating elements: seconds. An externally powered electric engine block heater is available as optional equipment or from your • Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior authorized dealer. surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild The message ⬙Plug In Engine Heater⬙, will be displayed washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elein the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature ments. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with is below 5°F (-15°C) at the time the engine is shut off as warm water. a reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive start. window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147 will illuminate and the EVIC will show how long the function remains active. For further information, refer to This indicator will illuminate when the front fog “Follow Me Home” in “Understanding The Features of lights are on. Your Vehicle”. 4. Low Fuel Light 7. Turn Signal Indicator When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.0 The arrow will flash in unison with the exterior gallon (3.8L) this light will turn on, and remain on turn signal, when using the turn signal lever. until fuel is added. 3. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped 5. High Beam Indicator This light indicates that the headlights are on high beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the steering wheel to switch the headlights to low beam. 8. Generic Warning Light The Generic Warning Light will illuminate if any of the following conditions occur: Oil Change Request, Engine Oil Pressure Sensor 6. Park/Headlight ON Indicator / Follow Me Home Failure, External Light Failure, Fuel Cut-Off (Headlight Delay) Indicator — If Equipped Intervention, Fuel Cut-Off Not Available, Parking Sensor This indicator will illuminate when the park Failure. lights or headlights are turned on. If the Follow Me Home feature is activated this indicator 4 148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. When driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt This light will turn on for four seconds as a Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound. bulb check when the ignition switch is first Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized 12. Charging System Light dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” This light shows the status of the electrical chargin “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for ing system. The light should come on when the further information. ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on 9. Air Bag Warning Light briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential This light will turn on when the electronic electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If speed control is ON. For further information, the charging system light remains on, it means that the refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Undervehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging standing Your Instrument Panel.” system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho11. Seat Belt Reminder Light rized dealer. 10. Cruise On Indicator — If Equipped When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/ If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting RUN, this light will turn on. If the driver’s seat Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149 your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and remain This light is used to manage the electrical on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on warning of the EPS (Power Steering System). during starting, have the system checked by an authoRefer to “Power Steering” in “Starting and rized dealer. Operating” for further information. 15. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light 14. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light Each tire, including the spare (if provided), This light informs you of a problem with the should be checked monthly when cold and Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a inflated to the inflation pressure recommended problem is detected, the light will come on by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the shift lever is placed in the NEUTRAL position. The light vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, tires.) see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing when the engine is running, imme- As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been diate service is required and you may experience reduced equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when 13. Power Steering System Warning 4 150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has to continue to function properly. not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously CAUTION! The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size (Continued) UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151 CAUTION! (Continued) equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood. 18. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of an onboard diagnostic system, called OBDII, that 16. Automatic Gearbox Fault monitors engine and automatic transmission conThis light will illuminate when there is an trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in automatic transmission fault. the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF/LOCK to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly. 17. Oil Pressure Warning Light Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The light poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after should turn on momentarily when the engine is started. If engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In 4 152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing. CAUTION! Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. WARNING! A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others. 19. Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condition. The engine coolant temperature indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153 20. Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the Brake Warning Light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the brake system reservoir. The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. If brake fault is indicated, immediate repair is necessary. WARNING! Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD fault, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF/LOCK position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer. The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position. NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. 4 154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 21. Electronic Stability Control OFF (ESC OFF) Indica- NOTE: tor Light • The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light come on momentarily This light indicates the Electronic Stability Coneach time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN. trol system (ESC) has been turned off by the driver. • Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off 22. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation / Malpreviously. function Indicator Light The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on for four seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on, see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. 23. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155 If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer. If with the engine running the warning light flashes, this means that the car is not protected by the engine inhibitor device. Contact a Fiat dealer to have all the keys programmed. 26. Temperature Gauge 24. Door Ajar The temperature digital scale shows engine coolant temThis light will turn on to indicate that one or perature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily. more doors or the trunk may be ajar. The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, 25. Vehicle Security Light or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to If during starting, the key code is not correctly exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range. recognized, the Vehicle Security Light comes on in the instrument panel. In this case, turn CAUTION! the key to OFF and then to ON/RUN; if it is still locked, try again with the other keys that come with Driving with a hot engine cooling system could the vehicle. Contact a Fiat dealer if you still cannot start damage your vehicle. If all the segments of the the engine. (Continued) 4 156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CAUTION! (Continued) temperature gauge are lit, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service. WARNING! A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle.” Follow the warnings under the “Cooling System Pressure Cap” paragraph. 27. Odometer / Trip Odometer / Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display Area This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven. U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/ service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157 NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the instrument cluster, all warnings including “door” and “gate” and “Change Engine Oil” will only be displayed in the EVIC display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel.” 28. Fuel Gauge / Fuel Door Reminder 29. Tachometer The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range. Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage. 30. Speedometer The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per The fuel door reminder indicates that the fuel filler door hour (mph) and/or kilometers per hour (km/h). is located on the right side of the vehicle. When the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position, the digital scale will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. NOTE: The fuel gauge and range will not immediately update accurately when refueling with the engine on. 4 158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) The EVIC consists of the following: • System Status The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the • Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays instrument cluster. • Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) • Outside Temperature Display • Trip Computer Functions • Tire Pressure Monitoring Display Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159 EVIC Displays 4 Premium Instrument Cluster SPORT Instrument Cluster 1 2 3 4 5 — — — — — Temperature Indicator Fuel Level Gauge Clock Odometer Sport Mode 6 — Message Display 7 — Coolant Temperature Gauge 8 — Digital Speedometer 9 — Ice Warning Indicator 10 — Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) 1 2 3 4 5 — — — — — Ice Warning Indicator Temperature Indicator Fuel Level Gauge Clock Odometer 6 — Message Display 7 — Coolant Temperature Gauge 8 — Digital Speedometer 9 — Autostick® Gear Indicator 10 — Auto/Sport/ECO Indicator 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: When opening one of the front doors, the EVIC display will turn on the clock and the miles or kilometers Press the MENU button briefly to access the menu covered (for versions/markets, where provided) for a and/or go to next screen or to confirm the required menu few seconds. option. Press and hold the MENU button (approximately one second) to return to the main screen. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) button to scroll upward through the Setup Menu Press the UP EVIC Control Buttons displayed menu and the related options or to increase the displayed value. The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a and DOWN buttons to access cycle. Press the UP the different options and settings (setup). Press the DOWN button to scroll downward through the displayed menu and the related options The setup menu can be activated by pressing the MENU or to decrease the value displayed. or DOWN butbutton. Single presses on the UP tons will scroll through the setup menu options. The NOTE: UP and DOWN buttons activate differmenu includes the following functions: ent functions according to the following situations: • To scroll the menu options upwards or downwards. • To increase or decrease values during settings. • Speed Beep • Trip B Data • Set Time UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161 • Set Date • Exit Menu • See Radio Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without Submenu • Speed Display • Autoclose • Units • Language • Buzzer Volume 1. Briefly press the MENU button to select the main menu option to set. or DOWN button (by single 2. Press the UP presses) to select the new setting. • Button Volume 3. Briefly press the MENU button to store the new setting and go back to the main menu option previously selected. • Daylights (D.R.L.) Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Submenu • Hill Start 1. Briefly press the MENU button to display the first submenu option. • Tire Pressure • Unlock Driver Door First • Unlock All Doors or DOWN button (by single 2. Press the UP presses) to scroll through all the submenu options. 4 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3. Briefly press the MENU button to select the displayed scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change submenu option and to open the relevant setup menu. indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent or DOWN button (by single 4. Press the UP upon your personal driving style. presses) to select the new setting for this submenu Unless reset, this message will continue to display each option. time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN 5. Briefly press the MENU button to store the new position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and setting and go back to the previously selected subrelease the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicamenu option. tor system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), 6. Press and hold the MENU button to return to the main refer to the following procedure. menu (short hold) or the main screen (longer hold). 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (do not start the engine.) Change Engine Oil Indicator System Change Engine Oil 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly, three times within 10 seconds. Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil” message will 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position. flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you New Trip start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not To reset: reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. • Push and hold the TRIP button to reset the system Trip Computer manually. The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster. It • When the “Trip distance” reaches 99999.9 miles or features a driver-interactive display (displays informakilometers or when the “Travel time” reaches 999.59 tion such as; trip information, range, fuel consumption, (999 hours and 59 minutes), the system is reset autoaverage speed and travel time). matically. Trip Button • Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery resets the The TRIP button, located on the right steering column system. stalk, can be used to display and to reset the previously NOTE: If the reset operation occurs in the presence of described values. the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the infor• A short button press displays the different values. mation associated with Trip A or Trip B functions will be • A long button press resets the system and then starts a reset. new trip. 4 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Start Of Trip Procedure • Trip distance A With the ignition on, push and hold the TRIP button for • Average consumption over one second to reset. • Instantaneous consumption Exit Trip • Average speed A To exit the Trip function, wait until all the values have been displayed or hold the MENU button for longer than • Travel time A (driving time) one second. “Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to: Briefly push the MENU button to go back to the menu • Trip distance B screen or push and hold the MENU (approximately one • Average consumption second) to go back to the main screen without storing settings. • Average speed B Trip Functions • Travel time B (driving time) Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of new NOTE: “Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip B trip). Data”). “Range” and “Instantaneous consumption” cannot be reset. “Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to: • Range UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 Values Displayed Average Consumption Range This value shows the approximate average consumption since the last reset. This indicates the distance which may be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that driving Instant Consumption conditions will not change. The message “----” will This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is conappear on the display in the following cases: stantly updated. The message “----” will appear on the • Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km). display if the car is parked with the engine running. • The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine Average Speed running. This value shows the vehicle’s average speed as a funcNOTE: The range depends on several factors: driving tion of the overall time elapsed since the last reset. style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain roads, Travel Time etc.), conditions of use of the car (load, tire pressure, etc.). This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset. Trip planning must take into account the above notes. Distance Traveled This value shows the distance covered since the last reset. 4 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) Dimmer 2. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the MENU (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing settings. The EVIC display is provided with a light sensor capable of detecting environmental light conditions and adjust- Speed Beep (Speed Limit) With this function, it is possible to set the car speed limit ing the brightness of the instruments accordingly. (mph or km/h) to immediately alert the driver when the NOTE: The brightness of the instrument panel may set limit is exceeded. change while travelling following an event that causes switching from “day” to “night” conditions (or vice To set the speed limit, proceed as follows: versa) in the passenger compartment (e.g. in a tunnel, on 1. Briefly press the MENU button to enter the Main avenues in shadows, under bridges, etc.). MENU. To adjust the brightness, proceed as follows: or DOWN button to select 2. Press the UP or DOWN button to set the Speed Beep. Press the MENU button, press the 1. Press the UP required brightness level. or DOWN buttons to select Speed Limit UP activation (On) or deactivation (Off). UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 3. When the function is activated (On), briefly press the To cancel the setting, proceed as follows: MENU button to display the presently set activation 1. Briefly press the MENU button. “On” will flash on the or DOWN buttons speed. Pressing the UP display. selects the speed limit. Press MENU to confirm button. “Off” will flash on the 2. Press the DOWN selection. display. NOTE: The setting can be increased or decreased by 5 mph or km/h each time the UP/DOWN button is 3. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approxipressed for speed settings above 20 mph (32 km/h). To mately one second) to go back to the main screen increase or decrease the set speed rapidly, press and hold without storing the settings. the UP/DOWN button. Save the setting by briefly pressing the button when you approach the required setting. Trip B Data (Trip B On) • Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu Through this option, it is possible to activate (On) or screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approxi- deactivate (Off) the Trip B (partial trip) display. mately one second) to go back to the main screen For further information see “Trip Computer.” without storing the settings. For activation / deactivation, proceed as follows: 1. Briefly press the MENU button. 4 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL or DOWN button to select 3. Select the required option and then press the MENU 2. Press the UP Trip B data. Press the UP or DOWN buttons button. to turn ON or OFF 4. When accessing the “Time” sub-menu item, briefly 3. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu press the MENU button and “hours” will flash on the screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approxidisplay. mately one second) to go back to the main screen or DOWN button for setting. 5. Press the UP without storing the settings. 6. Briefly press the MENU button and “minutes” will Set Time (Clock) flash on the display. This function may be used to set the clock through two or DOWN button for setting. 7. Press the UP submenu items: “Time” and “Mode.” NOTE: Proceed as follows: • The setting will increase or decrease by one unit each or 1. Briefly press the MENU button. Press the UP time the UP or DOWN button is pressed. buttons to highlight Set Time — Press DOWN Press and hold the button to increase/decrease the MENU button. setting rapidly. Save the setting by briefly pressing the button when you approach the required set2. Press the UP or DOWN button to navigate ting. the two sub-menu items. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 • Briefly press the MENU button to return to the 1. Briefly press the MENU button. Press the UP or “Time” sub-function. button to highlight Date, press the DOWN MENU button and Year will begin to flash. • When accessing the “Mode” submenu, briefly press the MENU button. The previously set display format 2. Press the UP or DOWN button for setting. will flash on the display. 3. Briefly press the MENU button and “month” will flash or DOWN button to select • Press the UP on the display. “24h” or “12h.” or DOWN button for setting. 4. Press the UP When you have selected the required settings, briefly press the MENU button to go back to the Time, Mode 5. Briefly press the MENU button and “day” will flash on the display. sub-menu screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen 6. Press the UP or DOWN button for setting. without storing the settings. NOTE: The setting will increase or decrease by one unit Set Date or DOWN button is pressed. each time the UP This function may be used to set the date (day - month - Press and hold the UP or DOWN button to year). increase/decrease the setting rapidly. Save the setting by briefly pressing the button when you approach the To change the date proceed as follows: required setting. 4 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu 3. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approxiscreen, or press and hold the MENU button (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen mately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing the settings. without storing the settings. If the radio has BLUE&ME™, refer to the appropriate With this function active, the EVIC display shows infor- “BLUE&ME™ Radio Supplement” for further information. mation relevant to the sound system. Speed Display • Radio: tuned radio station frequency, automatic tuning When this function is activated the cluster will display activation or AutoSTore. the vehicle speed (MPH or km/h). • CD audio, CD MP3: track number. To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) the speed display To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) the sound system feature, proceed as follows: info displaying proceed as follows: or 1. Briefly press the MENU button. Press the UP or 1. Briefly press the MENU button. Press the UP DOWN button to highlight Speed Display. Press button to highlight See Radio and press Down the MENU button to enter the Speed Display the MENU button. MENU. or DOWN button for setting. 2. Press the UP See Radio (Repeat Audio Information) UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 2. Press the UP or DOWN button to select 3. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu display deactivation “Off”, “MPH” or “km/h”. screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen 3. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu without storing the settings. screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approxiUnits (Set Units) mately one second) to go back to the main screen. This function may be used to set the measurement unit in three submenus: “Distance,” “Temperature” and “Fuel With this function active, the doors will automatically Economy, and Tire Pressure.” lock at when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). To set the required unit, proceed as follows: Autoclose To change the setting proceed as follows: or 1. Briefly press the MENU button. Press the UP DOWN button to highlight Units. Press the MENU button to enter Units MENU. or 1. Briefly press the MENU button. Press the UP DOWN button to highlight Autoclose. Press the 2. Press the UP MENU button to enter Autoclose MENU. or DOWN button to navigate the three sub-menus. 2. Press the UP or DOWN button for setting. 3. Select the required sub-menu and then briefly press the MENU button. 4 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 4. When accessing the “Distance” submenu: briefly press 2. Briefly press the MENU button to return to the the MENU button. Either “mi” or “km” will appear on sub-menu. the display (according to the previous setting). 3. When accessing the “Temperature” submenu: briefly or DOWN button for setting. 5. Press the UP press the MENU button. Either “°F” or “°C” will appear on the display (according to the previous 6. Briefly press the MENU button to return to the setting). sub-menu. or DOWN button for setting. 4. Press the UP 7. When accessing the “Fuel Economy” submenu, briefly press the MENU button. Either “mpg,” “km/l ” or 5. Briefly press the MENU button to return to the Tire Pressure — PSI/KPA sub-menu. “l/100km” will appear on the display (according to the previous setting). When you have made the required settings, briefly press If the distance unit set is “mi,” the fuel economy unit will the MENU button to go back to the sub-menu screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approximately one be displayed in “mpg.” second) to go back to the main screen without storing the If the distance unit set is “km,” the fuel economy unit will settings. be displayed in either km/l or l/100km. 1. Press the UP or DOWN button for setting. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 Language (Selecting The Language) Buzzer Volume (Adjusting The Failure/Warning The messages can be displayed in the following lan- Buzzer Volume) guages: Italian, English, Turkce, Nederlands, Spanish, With this function the volume of the buzzer accompanying any failure/warning indication can be adjusted to French, Dutch, Polish, Brasilian. one of eight volume levels. To set the required language, proceed as follows: To adjust the volume proceed as follows: or 1. Briefly press the MENU button. Press the UP button to highlight Language. Press the 1. Briefly press the MENU button. Press the UP or DOWN MENU button to enter the Language MENU. DOWN button the highlight the Buzzer Volume. Press the MENU button to enter the Buzzer Volume or DOWN button for setting. 2. Press the UP MENU. 3. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu or DOWN button for setting. 2. Press the UP screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen 3. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approxiwithout storing the settings. mately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing the settings. 4 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Button Volume (Button Volume Adjustment) Belt Buzzer (Buzzer Activation For S.B.R. This function may be used to adjust the volume of the Indication) or This function will only be displayed after a FIAT Group beep accompanying the buttons. MENU, UP buttons can be adjusted according to 8 Automobiles dealership has deactivated the S.B.R. system. DOWN levels. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) To adjust the volume, proceed as follows: This function may be used to activate / deactivate the or Daytime Running Lamps. 1. Briefly press the MENU button. Press the UP DOWN button to highlight the Buzzer Volume, Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off: press the MENU button. or 1. Briefly press the MENU button. Press the Up or DOWN button for setting. 2. Press the UP button to highlight Daytime Running DOWN Lamps (DRL). Press the MENU button to enter the 3. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu DRL MENU. screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen 2. Briefly press the MENU button. “On” or “Off” will without storing the settings. flash on the display (according to previous setting). 3. Press the UP or DOWN button for setting. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 4. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu To set the required unit, proceed as follows: screen, or press and hold the button (approximately 1. Briefly press the MENU button to display the two one second) to go back to the main screen without sub-menus. storing the settings. 2. Press the UP or DOWN button to navigate GSI (Gear Shift Indicator) the two sub-menus. This function may be used to set the Gear Shift Indicator in two submenus: “Fuel Econ On” and “Fuel Econ Off.” 3. Select the required sub-menu and then briefly press the MENU button. • Fuel Econ On – turns on a fuel economy upshift light or DOWN button for setting. in the instrument cluster, for optimum fuel economy, 4. Press the UP when operating in base driving mode. 5. Briefly press the MENU button to return to the sub-menu. • Fuel Econ Off – the fuel economy upshift light is disabled. When you have made the required settings, briefly press the MENU button to go back to the sub-menu screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing the settings. 4 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Hill Start Assist Tire Pressure This function is used when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. Hill Start Assist maintains the same level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the foot has been removed from the brake pedal. This function will be used to display the tire pressures individually for all four tires by location. Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off: Proceed as follows: or 1. Briefly press the MENU button. Press the UP DOWN button to highlight the Tire Pressure. Press the MENU button to enter the Tire Pressure MENU. or 1. Briefly press the MENU button. Press the UP button to highlight the Hill Start Assist. DOWN 2. Press the UP or DOWN button to scroll through all Press the MENU button to enter the Hill Start Assist four tire pressure value locations. MENU. 3. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu or DOWN button for setting. 2. Press the UP screen, or press and hold the button (approximately 3. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu one second) to go back to the main screen. screen, or press and hold the button (approximately Lock one second) to go back to the main screen without When Unlock Driver Door is selected, only the driver’s storing the settings. door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Unlock SALES CODE (RAB) RADIO Drivers Door is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger door. When All Doors is selected, both of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until “Unlock Driver Door” or “All Doors” appears. Exit Menu This function closes the initial menu screen. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the main screen. button to return to the first menu option Press the (Speed Beep). Press the button to return to the last menu option (Daylights). RAB Radio 4 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Introduction The radio has been designed according to the specifications of the passenger compartment, with a personalized design to match the style of the dashboard. If the radio has BLUE&ME™, refer to the appropriate “BLUE&ME™ User’s Manual” for further information. The instructions for use are given below and we recommend you to read them carefully. Suggestions Road Safety mountains, buildings or bridges, or when you are far away from the broadcaster. WARNING! Having the volume turned up high can cause the driver to not be able to hear important traffic sounds, i.e. sirens, horns, etc. Failure to hear traffic sounds and other important audible information can result in serious injury or death. Always adjust the volume so that you can still hear background noises. Care And Maintenance Please, learn how to use all different radio functions (e.g. Clean the cover with a soft antistatic cloth only. Cleaning store stations) before beginning to drive. and polishing products could damage the surface. Reception Conditions Reception conditions change constantly while driving. Reception may be interfered with by the presence of UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 CDs • Do not stick labels on the CD surface or write on the recorded surface with pencils or pens. The presence of dirt, scratches or distortions on the CDs could cause skipping and poor sound quality while it is • Do not use CDs that are very scratched, flawed, playing. For optimal playback conditions, follow these distorted, etc. Using discs like these will result in guidelines: malfunctions or damage to the player. • Only use branded CDs. • • • • • The use of original CD media is required for the best quality audio production. Correct operation is not Clean every CD thoroughly removing any finger guaranteed when CD-R/RW media are used that were marks or dust using a soft cloth. Hold CDs by the not correctly burned and/or with a maximum capacity outside and clean them from the middle outwards. above 650 Mb. Never use chemicals (e.g. antistatics or thinners or sprays) for cleaning as they could damage the surface • Do not use commercially available protective sheets for CDs or discs, with stabilizers, etc. as they could get of the CDs. stuck in the internal mechanism and damage the disc. After listening to them place CDs back in their boxes to • If a copy-protected CD is used, it may take a few prevent them from being damaged. seconds before the system starts to play it. The CD Do not expose CDs to direct sunlight, high temperaplayer cannot be guaranteed to play all protected tures or moisture for long periods. discs. The fact that the CD is protected from being 4 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL copied is often shown in very small letters or is • Two 100 mm diameter full range speakers, one speaker in each of the rear side panels. difficult to read on the actual CD cover where it may be, for example, “COPY CONTROL,” “COPY PRO• Antenna on the car roof. TECTED,” “THIS CD CANNOT BE PLAYED ON A • Radio with CD/MP3 player. PC/MAC.” • The CD player is capable of reading most compression With Alpine Premium Audio system (if equipped): systems currently in use, following the development of • Two 165 mm diameter midwoofer speakers. these systems, the reading of all compression formats • Two 11 mm tweeter speakers in the front pillars. is not guaranteed. Technical Specifications The complete system consists of: • Two 100 mm full range speakers, one speaker in each of the rear side panels. • An amplifier in the trunk on the right-hand side panel. • Two 165 mm diameter midwoofer speakers, one speaker in each of the front doors. • Antenna on the car roof. • Two 22 mm diameter tweeter speakers, one speaker in • Radio with CD/MP3 player. each of the front pillars. With BEATS Premium Audio system (if equipped): • A subwoofer in the trunk on the left-hand side panel. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 Quick Guide Radio Controls BUTTON TUNER A-B-C MEDIA GENERAL FUNCTIONS On Off AM, FM, SAT (if equipped) source selection Cycles A, B, C presets for AM, FM, SAT (if equipped) CD/AUX/Media Player (if equipped and present) source selection MODE Short button press Short button press Short repeated button press Short repeated button press Short repeated button press 4 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BUTTON (Mute/Pause Button) AUDIO GENERAL FUNCTIONS Volume activation/deactivation (Mute/Pause) MODE Short button press Menu activation: short button press or Adjustment type selection: press Adjustment of values: press or MENU Audio adjustments: low tones (BASS), high tones (TREBLE), left/ right balance (BALANCE), front/ rear balance (FADER) Song, Artist, Album, Genre, Playlist, Folder information (if available) in CD, Media Player and Satellite (if so equipped); Toggles RBDS information in FM Advanced functions adjustment +Vol/–Vol Volume adjustment (Information Button) Menu activation: short button press or Adjustment type selection: press Adjustment of values: press or Press + button: volume increase Press – button: volume decrease UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 BUTTON RADIO FUNCTIONS Radio Station Search: • Automatic Search • Manual Search 12345 Current radio station storing Stored station recall BUTTON CD FUNCTIONS CD ejection Previous/next track play CD track fast forward/rewind Previous/next folder play (for CDMP3) MODE Automatic search: press buttons or (long press for fast forward) Manual search: press buttons or (long press for fast forward) Long button press for memory preset 1 to 5 respectively Short button press for memory preset 1 to 5 respectively MODE Short button press Short button press Long button press Short button press or or or 4 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL General Information CD Section The radio offers the following functions: • Track selection (forward/backward) Radio Section • Fast forward/rewind through tracks • PLL tuning with FM/AM bands • CD Display function: display of track number and on mp3 discs (song title, artist) and time elapsed since start of the track • RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System) • Automatic/manual station tuning • FM Multipath detector • Manual storing of 25 stations (base radio) and 40 stations (if equipped with Satellite): 15 on FM band (5 on FMA, 5 on FMB, 5 on FMC), 10 on AM band (5 on AMA, 5 on AMB), 15 on Satellite Band - if equipped (5 on SATA, 5 on SATB, 5 on SATC) • SPEED VOLUME function: Customer selectable automatic volume adjustment depending on the car speed • Automatic Stereo/Mono selection • Playing Audio CD, CD-R and CD-RW WARNING! On multimedia CDs, besides audio tracks, there are data tracks too. Playing this type of CD could cause hissing at a volume that could jeopardize road safety as well as causing damage to the speakers. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 CD/MP3 Section • Separate bass/treble tone adjustment • MP3-Info function (ID3-TAG) • Right/left channel balancing • Folder selection (previous/next) • Front/rear fader • Track selection (forward/backward) Functions And Adjustments • Fast forward/rewind through tracks Turning The Car Radio On (ON/OFF) button • MP3 Display function: display of folder name, ID3- The car radio comes on when the is pressed briefly. TAG information, time elapsed since the start of the track, name of the file When the car radio is turned on and the on volume limit is on, the volume is limited to a setting of five even if it • Playing audio or data CD, CD-R and CD-RW had been set higher when previously used. Audio Section Turning The Car Radio Off • Mute/pause function Press the (ON/OFF) button to turn the radio off. • Soft mute function • Loudness function • Graphic 7 band equalizer (if equipped) 4 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL button again to deactivate the MUTE Press the function. The volume will gradually increase until it By pressing the TUNER button briefly and repeatedly, reaches the previously set level. the following audio sources can be selected cyclically: When the volume level is changed using the dedicated • AM, FM and Satellite Bands (if equipped) controls, the Mute function is deactivated and the volSelecting The CD Function ume is adjusted to the new level selected. By briefly pressing the MEDIA button, the CD audio Audio Adjustment source can be selected (only if a CD is loaded). The functions that can be selected from the audio menu Volume Adjustment change depending on the context: AM/FM/MEDIA/ To adjust the volume, press the buttons +Vol or –Vol to SATELLITE. increase/decrease the volume. Press the AUDIO button briefly to change the Audio Selecting The Radio Functions functions. After the AUDIO button is first pressed, the display will show the Bass level value for the source Press the button briefly to activate the MUTE funcactivated at that time (e.g. in FM mode the display will tion. The volume will gradually decrease and the show the wording “FM Bass +2”). wording “TUNER Mute” will be shown on the display (in radio mode) or “CD Pause” (in CD mode). Mute/Pause Function UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 Use the buttons or to scroll through the Menu • USER EQUALIZER — If equipped (customized equalization adjustment) functions. To change the setting of the selected funcor buttons. tion, use the Tone Adjustment The current status of the selected function appears on the Proceed as follows: display. 1. Press AUDIO button. The functions managed by the Audio Menu are: or button to select “Bass,” “Mid2. Press the • BASS (Bass adjustment) range” or “Treble” in the AUDIO menu. • MIDRANGE (Midrange adjustment) 3. Press the or button or to increase/decrease • TREBLE (Treble adjustment) • BALANCE (right/left Balance adjustment) • FADER (front/rear Balance adjustment) the bass or treble adjustments. By pressing the or buttons briefly, the levels will change progressively. By pressing them down longer, the levels will change quickly. • LOUDNESS — If equipped (Loudness function Balance Adjustment activation/deactivation) Proceed as follows: • EQUALIZER — If equipped (activation and selection 1. Press AUDIO button. of factory equalization adjustments) 4 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL or 2. Press the AUDIO menu. button to set “Balance” in the 3. Press the button to increase the sound coming from the rear speakers or the button to increase the sound coming from the front speakers. 3. Press the button to increase the sound from the button to increase the sound By pressing the or buttons briefly, the levels will left speakers or the from the right speakers. change progressively. By pressing them down longer, the levels will change quickly. By pressing the or buttons briefly, the levels will change progressively. By pressing them down longer, Select the value “0” to set the right and left audio outputs the levels will change quickly. at the same level. Select the value “0” to set the right and left audio outputs Loudness Function — If Equipped at the same level. The Loudness function improves the volume of the sound while listening at low volumes, increasing the bass Fader Adjustment and treble. Proceed as follows: To activate/deactivate this function, select the “Loudness” 1. Press AUDIO button. setting in the AUDIO menu. The condition of the function or button to set “Fader” in the (on or off) is shown on the display for a few seconds by the 2. Press the AUDIO menu. wording “Loudness On” or “Loudness Off”. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 Preset/User/Classic/Rock/Jazz Functions — If Equipped When one of the equalizer adjustments is activated the wording “EQ” lights up. The built-in equalizer can be activated/deactivated. When the equalizer function is off, the audio settings can only be changed by adjusting the “Bass” and “Treble” settings, whereas when the function is on, the acoustic curves can be adjusted. To deactivate the equalizer, select the “EQ Preset” function in the audio menu. User EQ Settings Function — If Equipped To set a personalized equalizer adjustment: 1. Press AUDIO button. 2. Use the or buttons to set EQ function. 3. Use or buttons to select ⬙EQ User.⬙ To activate the equalizer, use the AUDIO button or to 4. Press MENU button to start adjusting equalizer. select one of the adjustments: • “EQ User” (adjustment of 7 equalizer bands that can 5. On the display a seven bar graph will appear, in which each bar represents a frequency. Select the bar to be be changed by the user) or buttons. The selected adjusted by using the • “Classic” (equalizer preset for optimal classic music bar will start to flash and it can be adjusted using sound) or buttons. • “Rock” (equalizer preset for optimal rock and pop 6. To store the setting, press the MENU or AUDIO music sound) buttons. • “Jazz” (equalizer preset for optimal jazz music sound) 4 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Menu • SiriusXM Telephone Number MENU Button Functions • System Reset Press the MENU button briefly to activate the Menu • Speed Volume function. • On Volume Limit or buttons to scroll through the menu Use the Press the MENU button again to exit the Menu function. functions. To change the setting of the selected funcor buttons. tion, use the Speed Volume Function — If Equipped The current status of the selected function appears on the This function automatically adapts the volume level to display. the speed of the car, turning up the volume when the speed increases to maintain the ratio with the noise level The functions managed by the Menu are: inside the passenger compartment. To activate/ • Speech Volume deactivate the function, use the buttons. The wording “Speed volume” appears on the display, followed by the • Aux Audio Offset current status of the function: • Radio Off • Off: function deactivated • Sat ID • Low: function activated (low sensitivity) UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 • High: function activated (high sensitivity) On Volume Limit • “On volume limit: off” – The radio will come on at the same volume as before it was switched off. The volume level can be between 0 and 40. This function makes it possible to activate/deactivate the or to change the setting. Use the buttons maximum volume limit when turning the radio on. NOTE: The display shows the function status: • Using the Menu it is only possible to adjust the • “On volume limit: on” – when the radio is turned on activation/deactivation of the function and not the the volume level will be: minimum or maximum volume value. – If the volume level is equal to or higher than the maximum value, the radio will come on at the • If the battery charge is too low, the volume cannot be adjusted between the minimum and the maximum maximum volume. level. – If the volume level is between the minimum and maximum values, the radio will come on at the Radio Off Function same volume as before it was switched off. This function makes it possible to set the radio switching – If the volume level is equal to or lower than the off mode by choosing between two methods. minimum value, the radio will come on at the minimum volume. 4 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The chosen mode appears on the display: on the display. At the end of the operation, the source does not change and the previous situation will be displayed. • “Radio off: 00 min” — The radio turns off in connection with the ignition key; the radio is turned automatically off as soon as the key is turned to the STOP Radio position. (Tuner) Introduction • “Radio off: 20 min” — The radio turns off indepen- When the car radio is turned on, the last function that dently from the ignition key; the radio remains on for was selected before turning it off (Radio, CD, CD MP3, a maximum period of 20 minutes after the key has AUX) is activated. been turned to the STOP position. To select the Radio function when another audio source is System Reset Function being listened to, briefly press the TUNER button. This function is used to restore all settings to the factory Once the Radio mode has been activated, the display will values. The options are: show the name (RBDS stations only) or the frequency of • NO — No restore intervention. the selected radio station, the frequency band selected (e.g. FMA) and the preset button number (e.g. P1). • YES — The default parameters will be restored. During such operation, the wording “Resetting” appears UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 Frequency Band Selection • 15 in SAT (if so equipped) (5 SATA, 5 SATB, 5 SATC) With the Radio mode active, press the FM or AM tuner To listen to a preset station, select the desired frequency button briefly and repeatedly to select the desired recep- band and then briefly press the corresponding preset tion band. button (from 1 to 5). Each time the button is pressed the following bands are By pressing the preset button for more than 2 seconds, selected cyclically: the tuned station will be stored. Pressing the A-B-C button will change between the preset memory group in • AM, FM or SAT (if equipped) the current frequency band. Each band is highlighted by the corresponding wordings Automatic Tuning on the display. The radio will be tuned to last station Briefly press the or button to start the automatic selected on the respective frequency band. tuning search for the next station that can be received Preset Buttons in the selected direction. The buttons numbered from 1 to 5 are used to set the If the or button is pressed for longer, the rapid following pre-selections: search is started. When the button is released, the • 15 in the FM band (5 in FMA, 5 in FMB, 5 in FMC tuner will stop on the next station that can be received. • 10 in the AM band (5 in AMA, 5 in AMB) 4 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Manual Tuning This is used to manually search for stations in the preselected band. Select the desired frequency band and then press briefly or button to start the search in and repeatedly the or button is pressed the desired direction. If the longer, the fast search starts and then stops when the button is released. Stereophonic Broadcasters If the incoming signal is weak, the reproduction is automatically switched from Stereo to Mono. SiriusXM Satellite Radio — If Equipped SiriusXM Satellite Radio With over 130 channels, SiriusXM Satellite Radio brings you more of what you love. Get 69 channels of 100% commercial-free music, plus all of your favorite sports, news, talk and entertainment. Hear every NFL game, every NASCAR race, college sports and more. The biggest and most compelling names in talk with Howard Stern and Martha Stewart, laugh-out-loud comedy with Jamie Foxx’s The Foxxhole and Blue Collar Comedy, plus kids’ programming, world-class news, local traffic and weather. All of this with crystal clear, coast-to-coast coverage. Everything worth listening to is now on SiriusXM. A one-year SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription is included. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. SiriusXM Radio requires a subscription, sold separately after trial subscription included with vehicle purchase. Prices and programming are provided by SiriusXM and are subject to change. Subscriptions governed by Terms & Conditions available at sirius.com/service terms. SiriusXM Radio U.S. service only available to those at least 18 years of age in the 48 contiguous United States, D.C., and PR. Service available in Canada; see www.siriuscanada.ca. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Program Types Program Types can be selected by pressing the or buttons. The Program Type will change to the next category and the radio will then tune to first station in or buttons will tune that program type. Pressing to only the stations in that program type. Re-Subscribe To SiriusXM Satellite Radio New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with their radio. Following expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen in order to re-subscribe. Press the UP/DOWN button to scroll through the Menu Pressing the or buttons until ⬙All⬙ is displayed Functions, and the Left/Right button to change the will allow normal tuning to all stations. selected Set-up Menu function. The Program Types available are: All, Pop, Rock, Write down the Electronic Serial Number (ESN) for your Electronic/Dance, Hip-Hop/R&B, Country, Christian, receiver. To retrieve the Electronic Serial Number of Jazz/Standards, Classical, Latin/World, Sports, EnterSiriusXM Satellite Receiver Module tune to Channel 0. tainment, Talk, News, NPR, Comedy, Family & Health, Make sure that when the order is placed, the ESN are Religion, Traffic/Weather. correct. If any of the ESN numbers are not entered You can find the SiriusXM current terms and conditions correctly, then the SiriusXM subscription will not be able at http://www.sirius.com. to be transferred to the new radio and will not be active when installed in the customer’s vehicle. To reactivate 4 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL your service, either call the number listed on the display Sirius Subscription Issues When Replacing A or visit the provider online. Sirius Radio CAUTION! Neither SIRIUS nor FIAT is responsible for any errors in accuracies in the SIRIUS data services or its use in vehicles. When a radio needs to be replaced, the dealer will need the SIRIUS information to order a new radio (even if the SIRIUS subscription has lapsed). The ESN number contains 12 digits. The following are instructions for retrieving the Electronic Serial Number (ESN) from FIAT 500 NAFTA model SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks radios: of SiriusXM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. SiriusXM Radio requires a subscription, sold separately after trial To retrieve the ESN of SIRIUS Satellite Receiver Module subscription included with vehicle purchase. Prices and tune to Channel 0. Make sure that when the order is programming are provided by SiriusXM and are subject placed, the ESN are correct. If any of the ESN numbers to change. Subscriptions governed by Terms & Condi- are not entered correctly, then the SIRIUS subscription tions available at sirius.com/service terms. SiriusXM will not be able to be transferred to the new radio and Radio U.S. service only available to those at least 18 years will not be active when installed in the customer’s of age in the 48 contiguous United States, D.C., & PR. vehicle. Visit www.sirius.com UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 Satellite Radio Antenna — If Equipped CD Player Selection The antenna for the satellite radio is mounted on the roof of the vehicle. Do not place items on the roof around the roof top antenna location. Objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger luggage items should be placed as far from the antenna as possible. Do not place items directly on or above the antenna. To activate the CD player built into the equipment, proceed as follows: CD Player Introduction • Load a CD with the equipment switched on. The first track will start to play. or • If a CD has already been loaded, turn on the radio and then briefly press the MEDIA button to select the “CD” function mode. The last track listened to will start to play. This chapter describes the operation of the CD player only. To operate the radio, refer to the description in the It is advisable to use original CDs to ensure optimal playing. If CD-R/RWs are used, we recommend using “Functions and Adjustments” chapter. good quality media that are burned at the slowest speed possible. 4 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL If the CD is not removed from the radio, it will automatiTo load the CD, insert it gently into the slot to activate the cally be reloaded about 20 seconds later but will not motorized loading system, which will position it cor- resume playing until the ⬙MEDIA⬙ button is pressed to select the CD mode. The radio will switch to the last rectly. source prior to CD mode. The CD can be loaded with the radio off and the ignition key turned to ON/RUN. In this case, the radio will The CD cannot be ejected if the radio is off. remain off. When the radio is turned on, the last source Possible Error Messages listened to before being switched off, will be activated. If the loaded CD cannot be read (e.g. a CD ROM has been When a CD is inserted, the display will show the symbol inserted or the CD is inserted the wrong way or there is “CD” and the wording “CD Reading.” They will remain a reading error) the display shows the wording “CD Disc displayed for the whole time required for the radio to error.” read the CD. When this time has elapsed the radio The CD will then be ejected and the audio source automatically starts playing the first track. activated before the CD mode selection will be heard. button with the radio turned on, to Press the A CD which cannot be read will not be ejected until these activate the motorized CD ejection system. After ejecfunctions are over. At the end, with the CD mode tion, the last audio source listened to before playing activated, the display will show the wording “CD Disc the CD will be heard. error” for a few seconds and then the CD will be ejected. CD Loading/Ejecting UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 Display Information Track Fast Forward/Rewind When the CD player is operating, information will ap- Keep the button pressed down to fast forward the button pressed down to pear on the display with the following meaning: selected track and keep the fast rewind the track. The fast forward/rewind will • “Track 5” indicates the CD track number. stop once the button is released. • “03:42” indicates the time elapsed since the start of the Pause Function track (if the relevant Menu function is activated). To pause the CD player, press the button. The wordTrack Selection ing “CD Pause” appears on the display. Briefly press the button to play the previous CD To resume listening to the track, press the button track and the button to play the next track. The again. tracks are selected cyclically: the first track is selected after the last track and vice versa. CD MP3 Player If the track has been played for more than 3 seconds, button, starts the track again from the pressing the beginning. In this case, if you want to play the button twice consecuprevious track, press the tively. Introduction This chapter describes the operation of the CD MP3 player. NOTE: Layer-3 audio decoding technology is licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia. 4 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • The sampling frequencies that can be reproduced are: 44.1 kHz, stereo (from 96 to 320 kbit/s) – 22.05 kHz, In addition to playing regular audio CDs, the radio is also mono or stereo (from 32 to 80 kbit/s). enabled to play CDROMs on which compressed audio files have been recorded in an MP3 format. • Tracks with a variable bit-rate can be reproduced. MP3 Mode To guarantee optimal reproduction, it is advisable to use NOTE: The track names must not include the following good quality CDs burned at the lowest speed possible. characters: spaces, ‘ (apostrophes), ( and ) (open and close brackets). During the burning of a MP3 CD, make sure The files on an MP3 CD are structured in folders that create lists of all the folders containing MP3 tracks that the names of the files do not contain these characters; (folders or subfolders are all on the same level). The if not, the radio will not be able to play the tracks folders that do not contain MP3 tracks cannot be selected. involved. The specifications and operating conditions for playing Selecting MP3 Sessions With Hybrid Discs MP3 files are the following: If a hybrid disc is inserted (Mixed Mode, Enhanced, • The CD-ROMs used should be burned in accordance CD-Extra) also containing MP3 files, the radio automatically starts playing the audio session. It is possible to with ISO standard 9660. move to the MP3 session while playing by keeping the • The music files should have the extension “.mp3” or CD button pressed for more than two seconds. “.wma” files with a different extension will not be reproduced. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 NOTE: When the function is activated the radio may take Selection Of Next/Previous Folder a few seconds to start playing. While checking the disc Press the button to select a next folder or the the display will show “CD Reading.” If no MP3 files are button to select the previous folder. The display detected, the radio will resume playing the audio session will show the number of the folder. from the point where it was interrupted. The folders are selected cyclically. The first folder is Display Information selected after the last folder and vice versa. ID3–Tag Information Display If no other folder/track is selected in the next two In addition to the information relating to the time seconds, the first track on the new folder will be played. elapsed, folder name and file name, the radio is also After the last track in a folder is played, the next folder capable of displaying ID3–TAG information relating to will be played. Title Track, Artist and Author. Structure Of The Folders When one of the ID3-TAG pieces of information is chosen to be displayed (Title, Artist, Album) and this informa- The radio with MP3 player: tion has not been recorded for the track played, the text • Recognizes only the folders that effectively contain ⬙UNKNOWN⬙ will be displayed for that field. MP3 format files. 4 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • If the MP3 files on a CD-ROM are structured in CD Player sub-folders their structure is compressed to a single The CD Does Not Play: level structure, where the sub-folders are taken to the The CD is dirty. Clean the CD. level of the main folders. The CD is scratched. Try using another CD. Troubleshooting General The CD Can Not Be Loaded: Sound Volume Low A CD is already loaded. Press the the CD. button and remove The Fader function should be adjusted to the values “F” (front) only to prevent the reduction in radio output MP3 File Reading power and the cancelling of the volume if the Fader level Track Skips While Playing Mp3 Files: adjustment is equal to R+9. The CD is scratched or dirty. Source Can Not Be Selected The Duration Of The Mp3 Tracks Is Not Correctly Nothing has been loaded. Load the CD or the MP3 CD to Displayed: be listened to. In some cases (due to the recording mode) the duration of the MP3 tracks can be displayed incorrectly. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone (If Equipped) Refer to the appropriate “BLUE&ME™ User’s Manual” for further information. Personal/Portable Navigation Device (PND) — If Equipped 4 A Personal/Portable Navigation Device (PND) is available as optional equipment for this vehicle, refer to the Navigation User Guide for further information. iPod®/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED USB/AUX Port This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be 1 — iPod® Or External USB Device Holder 2 — Cable Jack plugged into the USB port, located in the glove compart- 3 — USB Connector ment. Refer to the appropriate Blue&Me™ radio User’s Manual for iPod® or external USB device support capability. 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a The remote sound system controls are located on the rear pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom access the switches. of the rocker switch will decrease the volume. STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/ CD/AUX/Media Player, etc.) and can also be used to select/enter an item while scrolling through menu. The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand control is different depending on which mode you are in. The following describes the left-hand control operation in each mode. Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel) UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 Radio Operation Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone (If Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next Equipped) listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch Refer to the appropriate Blue&Me™ User’s Manual for further information. will “Seek” down for the next listenable station. The button located in the center of the left-hand control CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE will tune to the next preset station that you have proTo keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following grammed in the radio preset pushbutton. precautions: CD Player Operation 1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next surface. track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, wiping from center to edge. beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play. 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratchIf you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the second track; three times, it will play the third, etc. ing the disc. 4 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES or anti-static sprays. Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from 5. Store the disc in its case after playing. your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight. by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the too high. antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular turned down or off during mobile phone operation. disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) CLIMATE CONTROLS oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known The air conditioning and heating system is designed to good disc before considering disc player service. make you comfortable in all types of weather. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 Manual Heating And Air Conditioning 1. Temperature Control Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial to the left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures, while rotating to the right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures. 2. Blower Control Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the “0” (OFF) position. There are four blower speeds. 3. Recirculation Control Manual Temperature Control (MTC) Rotate this control to change the system between recirThe Manual Climate controls consist of a series of rotary culation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be dials and one inner push knob. used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. 4 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: • Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended. • Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow. • The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed weather could cause windows to fog on the inside, so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Se- for maximum airflow to the rear. • Bi-Level lect the outside air position for maximum defogging. Air is directed through the panel and floor • Recirculation can be used in all modes except for outlets. Defrost. • Floor • The A/C can be deselected manually without disAir is directed through the floor outlets with a turbing the mode control selection. small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demister outlets. 4. Mode Control • Mix Rotate this control to change the system between Modes Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and (Panel, Bi-Level, Floor, Mix, Defrost). side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield. • Defrost Air is directed through the windshield and side window demister outlets. Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting. MAX A/C For maximum cooling, use the A/C and recirculation modes at the same time. ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then, move the temperature control to the desired temperature. NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If or Defrost, even if the Air Conditioning (A/C) button is Equipped not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the • The Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) allows the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes driver to select individual comfort settings. only when necessary. • The system provides set-and-forget operation for optimum comfort and convenience. 5. A/C Button Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light • The system can be controlled manually, if desired. will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is The ATC system automatically maintains the interior engaged. comfort level desired by the driver and passenger. 4 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2. A/C Button Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning (A/C) setting. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. 3. Temperature Control Up Button Provides temperature up control. Push the button for warmer temperature settings. 4. Blower Control Up Button Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) 1. AUTO Temperature Control (ATC) Button Controls airflow, temperature, distribution, and air recirculation automatically. Press and release to select. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information. There are 12 blower speeds. The blower speed increases as you press this button. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. 5. Mix Mode Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 reducing moisture on the windshield. Performing this NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear. 6. Front Defrost 9. Blower Control Down Button Press and release to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when ON. The blower will auto- There are 12 blower speeds. The blower speed decreases matically default to medium-high if the Defrost mode is as you press this button. Performing this function will selected. Performing this function will cause the ATC to cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. switch into manual mode. 10. Temperature Control Down Button 7. Floor Mode Provides temperature down control. Push the button for Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small cooler temperature settings. amount flowing through the defrost and side window 11. Climate Control ON/OFF Button demister outlets. Press and release to turn the Climate Control ON or OFF. 8. Panel Mode 12. Recirculation Control Button Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow. Press and release to change the current setting. The Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch indicator illuminates when ON. into manual mode. 4 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will experi• When in Defrost mode, the Recirculation button will ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the flash if pressed. This indicates that you can not system to function automatically. proceed to this mode due to fogging risk. • When the Auto indicator is on and the Recirculation NOTE: NOTE: indicator is off, the Recirculation is in AUTO mode. If • It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for the Recirculation indicator is on, the Recirculation cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts setting is manual and Recirculation is on. the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible. Automatic Operation 1. Press the AUTO button on the Automatic Temperature • The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable Control (ATC) Panel, the indicator will illuminate feature. Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information when on. Center (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable Features” 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the in this section of the manual. system to maintain by adjusting the temperature control buttons. Once the desired temperature is dis- To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic played, the system will achieve and automatically mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain maintain that comfort level. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 on low until the engine warms up. The blower will up button and decreases when you press or hold the blower control down button. increase in speed and transition into AUTO mode. The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by This system offers a full complement of manual override pressing the blower control up or down buttons. The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds features. are selected. This allows the front occupants to control NOTE: Each of these features operates independently the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the from each other. If any feature is controlled manually, AUTO mode. temperature control will continue to operate automatiThe operator can also select the direction of the airflow cally. by selecting one of the following positions. Blower Control Panel Mode Manual Operation There are 12 fixed blower speeds. Use the blower control up or down buttons to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you press or hold the blower control Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets. 4 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Floor Mode Defrost Mode Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount Air comes from the windshield and side window demister outlets. Use Defrost mode with maxiof air is directed through the defrost and side mum temperature settings for best windshield and side window demister outlets. window defrosting. When the defrost mode is selected, Bi-Level the blower will automatically default to medium-high. Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets. NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system Press and release the Panel mode button and Floor will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or mode button to enter Bi-Level mode, the indicators ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be manually illuminate when ON. Performing this function will cause selected to clear the windshield and side glass. the ATC to switch into manual mode. Mix Mode Air Conditioning (A/C) Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator demister outlets. This mode works best in cold or to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable system. When in A/C mode with the ATC set to a cool while keeping the windshield clear. temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 outlets. If Economy mode is desired, press the A/C this button is selected. Push the button a second time to button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC display and turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle. deactivate the A/C system. NOTE: • If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows. • If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, select Defrost mode and increase blower speed. Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate interior air by pushing the RECIRCULATION control button. Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The recirculation LED will illuminate when NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature may be unavailable (indicator light shall blink) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off. 4 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works Window Fogging very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows. the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging. temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases, NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will auturning the air conditioning (pressing the A/C button) on tomatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control, air or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield. direction, and blower speed to maintain comfort. When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable. As the temperature gets colder, it may be necessary to Summer Operation direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher NOTE: In some cases during high temperature operablower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on tion, the air conditioning system performance may be the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the reduced. This is to help protect the engine from overheatDefrost mode. ing during the high load condition. Operating Tips UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an automatic recirculation system. When the system senses a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use Recirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort while in automatic mode. Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air using the high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility Winter Operation of compressor damage when the air conditioning system When operating the system during the winter months, is started again. make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstructions. 4 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS 䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 ▫ Five-Speed Manual Transmission. . . . . . . . . . .226 ▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .223 ▫ Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 ▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .223 ▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 ▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 ▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Extended Park Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 ▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System ▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 ▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . ▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 ▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Turbocharger “Cool Down” . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 䡵 AUTOSTICK® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . .226 . . .229 . . .231 . . .231 . . .231 . . .233 . . .238 5 220 STARTING AND OPERATING ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .249 䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .240 ▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . .249 ▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 ▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 ▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 ▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .251 䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 ▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 ▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 ▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .253 ▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 ▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 䡵 SPORT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 ▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . .246 ▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . .247 䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 ▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 ▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .261 ▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .263 ▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .264 STARTING AND OPERATING 221 䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .269 䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .282 ▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 ▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .272 ▫ Enhanced System — If Equipped . . . . . ▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 ▫ Premium TPM System . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 1.4L Engine . . ▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 1.4L Turbo . . . ▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 ▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . ▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 ▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . ▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .281 . . . . .283 . . . . .286 . . . . .288 . . . . .288 . . . . .292 . . . . .293 . . . . .293 . . . . .294 . . . . .294 . . . . .294 . . . . .295 5 222 STARTING AND OPERATING ▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 ▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .299 ▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 ▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 ▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .300 ▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 STARTING AND OPERATING 223 STARTING PROCEDURES Manual Transmission — If Equipped Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEUinside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts. TRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch WARNING! pedal is pressed to the floor. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with Automatic Transmission — If Equipped access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or position before you can start the engine. Depress the others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- brake pedal before shifting to any driving gear. dren should be warned not to touch the parking NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or out of PARK. in a location accessible to children). A child could Normal Starting operate power windows, other controls, or move NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm the vehicle. engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. 5 224 STARTING AND OPERATING Turn the ignition switch to the AVV/ACC (START) position and release it when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. Cold Weather Operation To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking when the ambient temperature is less than –22° F (–30° C) and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine block heater has not been used. An externallypowered electric engine block heater is available as optional equipment or from your authorized dealer. The message “plug in engine heater” will be displayed in the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is below 5° F (–15° C) at the time the engine is shut off as a reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold start. CAUTION! Use of the recommended oil and adhering to the prescribed oil change intervals is important to prevent engine damage and ensure satisfactory starting in cold conditions. Extended Park Starting NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has not been started or driven for at least 35 days. 1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle. 2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it when the engine starts. STARTING AND OPERATING 225 3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, cycle the ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the Extended Park Starting procedure. 4. If the engine fails to start after 8 attempts, allow the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat the procedure. If Engine Fails To Start WARNING! Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury. CAUTION! • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. • To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again. After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up. 5 226 STARTING AND OPERATING Turbocharger “Cool Down” This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to cool the turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depending on the type of driving and the amount of cargo, the pump will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been shut off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger. Although the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet operation, it is normal to hear it running during this time. MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED Five-Speed Manual Transmission WARNING! You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an incline. Shift Lever Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. STARTING AND OPERATING 227 NOTE: To shift into REVERSE from NEUTRAL, lift the REVERSE gear is not synchronized and the vehicle must ring under the knob and, at the same time move the be at a complete stop to shift into REVERSE gear. When selecting REVERSE gear, the driver should pause (apgearshift lever to the right and then backward. proximately 2 seconds) after pushing in the clutch pedal Use each gear in numerical order; do not skip a gear. Be and prior to shifting into REVERSE which allows gears to sure the transmission is in first gear, not third, when stop spinning. Should an unwanted clash noise be prostarting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch duced, the pause length should be increased. can result from starting in third gear. For most city driving, you will find it easier to use only NOTE: the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light • Clashing REVERSE gear, especially if vehicle is movaccelerations, fifth gear is recommended. ing, can result in transmission damage. Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, • During cold weather, until the transmission lubricant and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift pedal partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the transon the clutch. mission. 5 228 STARTING AND OPERATING Recommended Shift Speeds To use your manual transmission for optimal fuel economy, it should be upshifted as listed in the following table. Engine Size 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds Units In mph (km/h) Acceleration 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 Rate Accel 14 23 29 (23) (37) (47) Cruise 12 18 25 (19) (29) (40) 4 to 5 38 (61) 32 (52) STARTING AND OPERATING 229 When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade, Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and downshift early so that the engine will not be overburdened. prolong engine life. Downshifting CAUTION! If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift at too high of a vehicle speed, these conditions may cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is selected and the clutch pedal is released. Damage to the clutch and the transmission can result from skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal is held pressed (i.e., not released). To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift down to second or first gear when descending a steep grade. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED CAUTION! Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: • Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. • Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed. • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. 5 230 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK. WARNING! (Continued) • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key. Once the key is removed, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. (Continued) (Continued) WARNING! STARTING AND OPERATING 231 WARNING! (Continued) • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. • Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children). A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Key Ignition Park Interlock OFF (key removal) position. The key can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, and once removed, the transmission is locked in PARK. Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed. Six-Speed Automatic Transmission The transmission gear position display (located in the This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter- instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/ out of PARK (Refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. 5 232 STARTING AND OPERATING The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers). Shift Lever Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears. The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick® shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick® shift control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for further information). Toggling the shift lever forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the AutoStick® position (beside the DRIVE position) will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. STARTING AND OPERATING 233 NOTE: If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) it is probably in the AutoStick® (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick® mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the shift lever to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL. Gear Ranges PARK (P) This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range. When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake. DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before NEUTRAL into another gear range. shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffiallow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. cult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added This is especially important when the engine is cold. precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. 5 234 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. • Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle. • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key. Once the key is removed, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key and lock your vehicle. (Continued) (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 235 WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the ignition key/Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. • Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could result. • DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain. The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position: • When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated. 5 236 STARTING AND OPERATING • Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position. • With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK. REVERSE (R) This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. NEUTRAL (N) Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine may be started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle. WARNING! Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. CAUTION! Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting and Operating” and “Towing a Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. STARTING AND OPERATING 237 range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheatThis range should be used for most city and highway ing. driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission During cold temperatures, transmission operation may automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The be modified depending on engine coolant temperature. DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris- Normal operation will resume once the engine temperatics under all normal operating conditions. ture has risen to a suitable level. DRIVE (D) When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head winds), use the AutoStick® shift control (refer to the AutoStick® in this section for further information) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuIf the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat- minated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be ing limits, the transmission controller will expand the driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission. 5 238 STARTING AND OPERATING In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the service is required. following steps: AUTOSTICK® 1. Stop the vehicle. AutoStick® is a driver-interactive transmission feature 2. Shift the transmission into PARK. providing manual shift control, giving you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick® allows you to maximize en3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. gine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and down4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. shifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also provide you with more control during 5. Restart the engine. passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no driving, and many other situations. longer detected, the transmission will return to normal Operation operation. When the shift lever is in the AutoStick® position (beside NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recomthe Drive position), it can be moved forward and rearmend that you visit your authorized dealer at your ward. This allows the driver to manually select the earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has transmission gear being used. Moving the shift lever diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. STARTING AND OPERATING 239 forward (-) triggers a downshift, and rearward (+) an upshift. The current gear is displayed in the instrument cluster. in snow or icy conditions. To select second or third gear after the vehicle is brought to a stop, tap the shift lever rearward (+) once or twice. NOTE: In AutoStick® mode, the transmission will only • The system will ignore shift commands that would shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever cause engine lugging or overspeed. An audible beep rearward (+) or forward (-), except as described below. will sound if an inappropriate gear is requested. • The transmission will automatically upshift when nec- • Avoid using speed control when AutoStick® is enessary to prevent engine over-speed. gaged because the transmission will not shift automatically. • The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will • Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when display the current gear. AutoStick® is engaged. • The transmission will automatically downshift to first • The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver fault or overheat condition is detected. should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the To disengage AutoStick® mode, return the shift lever to vehicle is accelerated. the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the • You can start out (from a stop) in first, second, or third AutoStick® position at any time without taking your foot gear. Starting out in second or third gear can be helpful off the accelerator pedal. 5 240 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! WARNING! Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury. Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.). DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Traction Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front (driving) wheels. When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed: 1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy. STARTING AND OPERATING 241 2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. Flowing/Rising Water 3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible. 4. Keep tires properly inflated. 5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop. DRIVING THROUGH WATER WARNING! Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Driving through water more than a few inches/ centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure Shallow Standing Water safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions and Warnings before doing so. 5 242 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! CAUTION! • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes. • Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. • Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it. Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle. • Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water. • Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. This will minimize wave effects. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 243 CAUTION! (Continued) • Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. • Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. POWER STEERING The electric power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually. WARNING! Continued operation with reduced or no power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible. If the Steering icon is flashing, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to an authorized dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. 5 244 STARTING AND OPERATING If the Steering icon is displayed and the “POWER STEER- NOTE: ING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is displayed on the • Even if the power steering assistance is no longer EVIC screen, they indicate that extreme steering maneuoperational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. vers may have occurred which caused an over temperaUnder these conditions there will be a substantial ture condition in the power steering system. Once drivincrease in steering effort, especially at low speeds and ing conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle during parking maneuvers. for a few moments until the icon and message turn off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Un- • If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informaservice. tion. PARKING BRAKE If the Steering icon is displayed and the “SERVICE POWER STEERING – ASSIST OFF” message is displayed Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking the EVIC screen, they indicate the vehicle needs to be brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave manual taken to an authorized dealer for service. Refer to “Elec- transmission in REVERSE or first gear. tronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding The parking brake lever is located in the center console. Your Instrument Panel” for further information. To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever completely. STARTING AND OPERATING 245 When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle. WARNING! Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. (Continued) 5 246 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision. • Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave a manual transmission in REVERSE or first (1st) gear. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury. CAUTION! If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. SPORT MODE Manual Transmission — If Equipped The Sport mode increases steering feedback to the driver with slight increases in effort and throttle pedal-to-engine response. This driving mode is useful while driving on twisty roads where more steering precision is desired in spirited cornering. STARTING AND OPERATING 247 1. To activate the Sport mode, press the SPORT button. Once activated, a SPORT message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. 2. Momentarily release the accelerator pedal. 3. Press the accelerator pedal again to activate. Automatic Transmission — If Equipped The Sport mode increases steering feedback to the driver with slight increase in effort and changes the transmission shift schedules for more aggressive shifting. This driving mode is useful while driving on twisty roads where more steering precision is desired in spirited cornering. SPORT Button 5 248 STARTING AND OPERATING 1. To activate the Sport mode, press the SPORT button. BRAKE SYSTEM In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for example; repeated brake applications with the engine off), the brakes will still function. The effort required to brake the vehicle will be significantly more than that required with the power system operating. SPORT Button Once activated, a SPORT message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. 2. Press the SPORT button again to return to the standard driving mode. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability, the remaining system will still function with some loss of braking effectiveness. This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and activation of the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light during brake use. STARTING AND OPERATING 249 The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When the light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS if the System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction Confault detected was only momentary. trol System (TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All systems work together to WARNING! enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC. • Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions. The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces. The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation, which is normal. effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. • The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. (Continued) 5 250 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) Brake Assist System (BAS) The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the When you are in a severe braking condition involving the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brakuse of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as ing pressure during the stopping sequence (do not the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal system reverting to the base brake system. is released, the BAS is deactivated. Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise. These occurrences are normal and indicate that the system is functioning properly. • The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. • The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. STARTING AND OPERATING 251 WARNING! • The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. • The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. • The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Traction Control System (TCS) This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for further information. Hill Start Assist (HSA) The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes his foot off the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The 5 252 STARTING AND OPERATING system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel. HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate: • Vehicle must be stopped. WARNING! There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle. • Vehicle must be on a 2.5% (manual transmission) or 7% Disabling/Enabling HSA grade or greater (automatic transmission) hill. If you wish to turn the HSA system on or off, it can be • Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., done using the Customer Programmable Features in the vehicle in NEUTRAL (manual transmission), vehicle Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informais in REVERSE gear). tion. STARTING AND OPERATING 253 • Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position. This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteering or understeering condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position. ESC Off Switch (Automatic Transmission) 5 254 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! ESC Off Switch (Manual Transmission) NOTE: The ESC Off switch is located left of the steering column (Manual Transmission Only). The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. STARTING AND OPERATING 255 ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has two available operating modes. Full On This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in On mode. This mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC should only be turned to Partial Off for specific reasons as noted below. Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the switch again. This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation. NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the switch. Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion. 5 256 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! • When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced. on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during accelESC OFF Indicator Light eration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator driving to the prevailing road conditions. Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position for four seconds. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes STARTING AND OPERATING 257 NOTE: TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION • The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and Tire Markings the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON. • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously. 5 The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially off. 1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN) 2 — Size Designation 3 — Service Description 4 — Maximum Load 5 — Maximum Pressure 6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades 258 STARTING AND OPERATING • Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: molded into the sidewall preceding the size designaT145/80D18 103M. tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H. • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design • European-Metric tire sizing is based on European standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded design standards. Tires designed to this standard have into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT. the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. NOTE: • LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. STARTING AND OPERATING 259 Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE: Size Designation: P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards T or S = Temporary spare tire 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) – Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) R = Construction code – ⬙R⬙ means radial construction – ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction 15 = Rim diameter in inches (in) 5 260 STARTING AND OPERATING EXAMPLE: Service Description: 95 = Load Index – A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol – A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions – The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) STARTING AND OPERATING 261 EXAMPLE: Load Identification: ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire Light Load (LL) = Light load tire C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire. with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Tire Identification Number (TIN) 5 262 STARTING AND OPERATING EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation – This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) – 03 means the 3rd week 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) – 01 means the year 2001 – Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 STARTING AND OPERATING 263 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term B-Pillar Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Maximum Inflation Pressure Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Tire Placard Definition The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures. 5 264 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. B-Pillar Location For Tire And Loading Information Placard STARTING AND OPERATING 265 Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the: 1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires. Loading Tire And Loading Information Placard The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section of this manual. 5 266 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuaxles must not be exceeded. For further information on pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard. “Vehicle Loading” in this section. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and To determine the maximum loading conditions of your passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg. XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here. STARTING AND OPERATING 267 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE: cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if • If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followbe five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the ing table shows examples on how to calculate total amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs vehicle with varying seating configurations and num(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) = ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration 650 lbs [295 kg]). purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo and load carry capacity of your vehicle. being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not • For the following example, the combined weight of safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs capacity calculated in step 4. (392 kg). 5 268 STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING AND OPERATING 269 WARNING! Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them. TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure: • Safety • Economy • Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Safety WARNING! • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions. • Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure. • Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure. • Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. (Continued) 5 270 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. • Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering. NOTE: • Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response. • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right. Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door. At least once a month: • Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgeProper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable properly inflated even when they are under-inflated. ride. Both underinflation and over-inflation affect the Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability STARTING AND OPERATING 271 • Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. CAUTION! Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes. After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter. Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always “cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition. Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low. 5 272 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Radial Ply Tires The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and WARNING! within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original combine them with other types of tires. equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatTire Repair ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. WARNING! High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria: • The tire has not been driven on when flat. • The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable). • The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm). STARTING AND OPERATING 273 Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped additional information. Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme- on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold driving conditions. For more information, contact a auservice description (Load Index and Speed Code). thorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all Tire Types season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on All Season Tires — If Equipped the tire sidewall. All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring, summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. 5 274 STARTING AND OPERATING If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Run Flat Tires — If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full tire inflation pressures. capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid mode. and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be See the tire pressure monitoring section for more inforpoorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro- mation. hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types. STARTING AND OPERATING 275 rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended NOTE: For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT instead of a tire rotation pattern. spare tire, please refer to “TIREFIT KIT” in “What To Do Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped In Emergencies” for further information. Spare Tires — If Equipped CAUTION! Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result. Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel — If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ 80D18 103M. T, S = Temporary Spare Tire Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipwheel equivalent in look and function to the original ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle on your vehicle at the first opportunity. of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire 5 276 STARTING AND OPERATING Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time. WARNING! Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity. Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the Full Size Spare — If Equipped original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. first opportunity. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the STARTING AND OPERATING 277 WARNING! Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not replaced. spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping. Tire Spinning 5 278 STARTING AND OPERATING tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information. Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to: • Driving style • Tire pressure • Distance driven • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended. These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the 1 — Worn Tire 2 — New Tire STARTING AND OPERATING 279 WARNING! Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a with oil, grease, and gasoline. wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match Replacement Tires those of the original wheels. The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicator.” Refer to the Tire and Loading It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. 5 280 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle. • Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision. • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control. (Continued) CAUTION! Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings. STARTING AND OPERATING 281 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage: • Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the traction device manufacturer. • Install on Front Tires. • Due to limited clearance, a 185/55R15 tire with a Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6 low profile traction device or equivalent is recommended. WARNING! Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision. CAUTION! To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions: • Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use. • Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). • Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). • Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. • Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement. (Continued) 5 282 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! (Continued) • Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). • Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire. TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed. The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross” and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be unequal rates. reversed. STARTING AND OPERATING 283 The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (6.5° C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will Tire Rotation also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) there should be no adjustment for this increased presThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the sure. driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure. 5 284 STARTING AND OPERATING The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire. The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold tire pressure on the placard. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68° F (20° C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20° F (-7° C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (159 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure value. STARTING AND OPERATING 285 CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) • The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warnings have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to your an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked. • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor. (Continued) NOTE: • The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition. • The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure. • Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. 5 286 STARTING AND OPERATING Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stopping ability. stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainteModule. nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale and to maintain the proper pressure. Light. The TPMS consists of the following components: • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, • Receiver Module. and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors. the tire. Base System • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumiinstrument cluster. nate in the instrument cluster, an audible chime will be activated, and the “Check left or right front/rear tire STARTING AND OPERATING 287 xxx.x psi” text message will display when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information. Check TPMS Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected, an audible chime will be activated and the “Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System” text message will display. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios: 1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors. 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals. 3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings. 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly. 1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire. 5 288 STARTING AND OPERATING 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire. 3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. Enhanced System — If Equipped When the vehicle is equipped with an enhanced TPM system, the driver can view text messages showing the actual tire pressure value by position by selecting the tire pressure menu command in the instrument cluster. Refer 4. This occurs for each subsequent ignition key cycle, a to the instrument panel features section of the owners chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring manual. Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and Premium TPM System then remain on solid. The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as readings to the receiver module. long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure STARTING AND OPERATING 289 The TPMS consists of the following components: • Receiver module • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors • Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) 5 • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure tire highlighted in a different color. Low Tire Indicator Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off. The vehicle may need 290 STARTING AND OPERATING to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will sound a chime and also display a “Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System” message in the EVIC for approximately 5 seconds and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received. Service TPM System Message If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will no longer flash, and the “Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System” message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. STARTING AND OPERATING 291 shown. This indicates that the pressure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be 1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving located in the correct vehicle position. The system still next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as needs to be serviced as long as the ⬙Service Tire Pressure the TPM sensors. Monitoring System⬙ message is displayed. 2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains NOTE: materials that may block radio wave signals. • The TPMS will not monitor the pressure in a replace3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or ment tire installed without a tire pressure sensor. wheel housings. • If you install a replacement tire in place of a road tire 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain on and The EVIC will also display a ⬙Service Tire Pressure a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the Monitoring System⬙ message for a minimum of five EVIC will still display a pressure value highlighted in seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect a different color. sensor location fault is detected. In this case, the ⬙Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System⬙ message is then fol- • After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above lowed with a graphic display with pressure values still 15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring A system fault can occur due to any of the following: 5 292 STARTING AND OPERATING Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will order for the TPMS to receive this information. display a “Service TPM System” message and then General Information display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and • For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” following conditions: will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will display a “Service Tire Pres- • This device may not cause harmful interference. sure Monitoring System” message and dashes (- -) in • This device must accept any interference received, place of the pressure value. including interference that may cause undesired operation. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it, the TPMS will update automatically. In addi- The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the tion, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will following licenses: turn off and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new MRXC4W4MA4 pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire United States pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any Canada 2546A-C4W4MA4 of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be (Single) STARTING AND OPERATING 293 FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 1.4L Engine FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 1.4L Turbo This engine is designed to meet all emisThis engine is designed to meet all emission regulations and provide satisfactory sion regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when usfuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded ⬙regular⬙ gasoing high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline with a minimum octane rating of 87. line with a minimum octane rating of 87. For optimum performance and fuel economy the use of For optimum performance and fuel economy the use of 91 octane or higher is recommended. 91 octane or higher is recommended. Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required. Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with the appropriate octane rating for your engine) before considering service for the vehicle. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with the appropriate octane rating for your engine) before considering service for the vehicle. 5 294 STARTING AND OPERATING Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.” Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality. Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle. CAUTION! Do not use gasoline containing Methanol or E-85 Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems and may damage critical fuel system components. The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline fuel system components. blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer. Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- does not have the negative effects of Methanol. genates such as 10% Ethanol, Methyl Tert-Butyl Ether E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (MTBE), and Ethyl Tret-Butyl Ether (ETBE). Oxygenates Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoare required in some areas of the country during the line containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions. ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. STARTING AND OPERATING 295 If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: exposure to E-85 fuel. • Operate in a lean mode. MMT In Gasoline • OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on. Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is • Poor engine performance. blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage • Poor cold start and cold drivability. beyond gasoline of the same octane number without • Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion. MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline E-85 perform the following: without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content • Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer). of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether • Change the engine oil and oil filter. the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal • Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the and California reformulated gasoline. engine controller memory. 5 296 STARTING AND OPERATING Materials Added To Fuel CAUTION! (Continued) All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel. Fuel System Cautions CAUTION! Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s performance: • The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system. (Continued) • An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance. • The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer. STARTING AND OPERATING 297 NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING! Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning: (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open. 5 298 STARTING AND OPERATING ADDING FUEL CAUTION! Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) The gas cap is located on the passenger side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle. • Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping from the system. • To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling. WARNING! • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled. Fuel Filler Cap (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 299 WARNING! (Continued) Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose, improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects a malfunction, the “gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message NOTE: will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This • When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected is full. twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving • Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one the problem will turn the MIL off. click. This is an indication that the cap is properly TRAILER TOWING tightened. • Never add fuel when the engine is running. It may cause the MIL to turn on and could cause a fire. • A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling. • If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled. Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended. 5 300 STARTING AND OPERATING RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Flat Tow Wheels OFF the Ground NONE Dolly Tow Front Rear ALL On Trailer Manual Transmission Transmission in NEUTRAL OK NOT ALLOWED OK Automatic Transmission NOT ALLOWED OK NOT ALLOWED OK STARTING AND OPERATING 301 This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground. This vehicle may also be towed using a tow dolly (with the front wheels OFF the ground). Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may be flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground) at any legal highway speed, for any distance, if the manual transmission is in NEUTRAL. CAUTION! DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain will result. If these vehicles require towing, make sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground. CAUTION! Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 5 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS 䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .305 䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .305 ▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 䡵 TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 ▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ TIREFIT Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 ▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . ▫ TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation . . . . .308 ▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ TIREFIT Usage Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 ▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 ▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . ▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 . . . . . .319 . . . . . .320 . . . . . .320 . . . . . .323 . . . . . .324 . . . . . .330 . . . . . .332 . . . . . .332 ▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 6 304 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 ▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM . .342 䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 305 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the instrument panel below the radio. potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action. Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. When the switch is activated, all direc- • On the highways — slow down. tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed. turn off the Hazard Warning flashers. NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down Do not use this emergency warning system when the an impending overheat condition: vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. system adds heat to the engine cooling system and If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the turning the A/C off can help remove this heat. Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate with • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked. heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers to high. This allows the heater core to act as a may wear down your battery. supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system. 6 306 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION! WARNING! Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument cluster will sound a chime. When safe, pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle. Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the H (red) mark for more than a minute, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 307 TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C). This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h). 6 TIREFIT Storage The TIREFIT kit is located under the front driver’s seat. TIREFIT Kit Location 308 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Your TIREFIT kit is equipped with the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode. Selecting Air Mode Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this position for air pump operation only. Use the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode. Selecting Sealant Mode TIREFIT Components 1 2 3 4 — — — — Sealant Bottle Deflation Button Pressure Gauge Power Button 5 — Mode Select Knob 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear) 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black) 8 — Power Plug (located on bottom side of TIREFIT Kit) Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this position to inject the TIREFIT Sealant and to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6) when selecting this mode. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 309 Using The Power Button Push and release the Power Button (4) once to turn On the TIREFIT kit. Push and release the Power Button (4) again to turn Off the TIREFIT kit. Using The Deflation Button Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated. 6 TIREFIT Usage Precautions TIREFIT Expiration Date Location • Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant • The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at the tire application use and need to be replaced after each lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure use. Always replace these components immediately at optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing a your original equipment vehicle dealer. Tire with TIREFIT” section (F) “Sealant Bottle and • When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form, clean Hose Replacement”. water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from 310 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded. • For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the TIREFIT kit. • You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them. The TIREFIT Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than ¼” (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle. • Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses. WARNING! • Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the TIREFIT kit. • Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances: – If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1/4” (6 mm) or larger. – If the tire has any sidewall damage. – If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure. – If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire. – If the wheel has any damage. – If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel. (Continued) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 311 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat source. • A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. • Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact with clothing. • TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately. (Continued) Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT (A) Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT: 1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s Hazard Warning flashers. 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses (6) and (7) to reach the valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the 6 312 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and 4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary valve stem. to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding. 5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. 3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or in Gear (manual transmission) and turn Off the igniNOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or tion. nails) from the tire. 4. Set the parking brake. (C) Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated (B) Setting Up To Use TIREFIT: Tire: 1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the • Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRESealant Mode position. FIT kit. 2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the from the fitting at the end of the hose. parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL. 3. Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the • After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white deflated tire. fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 313 NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and tire. the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6). If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (6): If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant Hose (6): 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the TIREFIT kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem. 1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 and not Air Mode. Press the Power Button (4) to turn psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease On the TIREFIT kit. quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is 2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt empty. power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available. Make sure the engine is running before 2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediturning ON the TIREFIT kit. ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure 3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side use. Call for assistance. 6 314 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire 3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3). valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the hose, and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vepressure within 15 minutes: hicle.” • The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance. CAUTION! NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing. If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes: 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the TIREFIT kit. 2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument panel. • The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get hot after use, so it should be handled carefully. • Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal TIREFIT kit components which may cause permanent damage to the kit. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 315 (D) Drive Vehicle: (E) After Driving: Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure to Use TIREFIT” before continuing. distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire. Do not 1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air exceed 55 mph (90 km/h). Mode position. WARNING! TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using TIREFIT. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. 2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. 3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve stem. 4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge (3). If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar): The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance. 6 316 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on TIREFIT and sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replaceinflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and ment”. loading information label on the driver-side door opening. NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Deflausing the TIREFIT service kit. tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement: mended inflation pressure before continuing. If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher: 2. Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem, 1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color). reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the Volt outlet. recessed area under the sealant bottle. 3. Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the 3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant vehicle. Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose of it accordingly. 4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire 4. Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT housservice center. ing. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 317 5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so Torque Specifications that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/ the front of the housing. Press the bottle into the Bolt Size Bolt Socket housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the Size bottle is locked into place. 66 Ft-Lbs (90 N·m) M12 x 1.25 17 mm 6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end Steel Wheels Only of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its 75 Ft-Lbs (100 N·m) storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump). Aluminum Wheels 7. Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the Only vehicle. **Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening. WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles. time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench. 6 318 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Wheel Mounting Surface Torque Patterns Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be nut/bolt has been tightened twice. sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against the wheel. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 319 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED WARNING! • Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. (Continued) • Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. • Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. • The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas. 6 320 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Jack Location Spare Tire Removal The jack and jack wrench tool are stowed in a bag under The spare tire is stowed to the underbody below the the front driver’s seat. cargo area. 1. Remove the plug located in the rear cargo area. Jack And Jack-Handle Location Winch Access Plug WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 321 2. Fit the wrench tool over the drive nut. Use the wrench to rotate the nut counterclockwise until the spare is on the ground with enough slack in the cable to allow you to pull the tire out from under the vehicle. 6 Lowering/Raising Spare Tire 322 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION! The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack wrench tool only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and they can damage the winch. 3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle. Spare Tire WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 323 4. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it Preparations For Jacking through the center of the wheel. 1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or slippery areas. WARNING! Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. 3. Set the parking brake. Retainer 4. Place the shift lever in PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE (manual transmission). 5. Turn Off the ignition. 6 324 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel. NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the vehicle is being jacked. Jacking Instructions WARNING! Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: WARNING! (Continued) • Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle. • Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. • Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised. • Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in REVERSE. • Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack. • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack. • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. (Continued) (Continued) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 325 WARNING! (Continued) • Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change. • If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic. • To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground. NOTE: Refer to the “Compact Spare Tire” section of the “Tires-General Information” under “Starting And Operating” for information about the spare tire, it’s use, and operation. CAUTION! Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle. 1. Remove the scissors jack and tool bag from under the driver’s seat. 2. Remove center cap. Jack Warning Label 6 326 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 3. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel bolts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground. NOTE: There are front and rear jacking locations on each side of the body (as indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding). Center Cap Removal NOTE: Before using the swivel wrench to remove the wheel bolts be sure to remove the center cap of the wheel by inserting the angled tab end of the swivel wrench into the notched part of the center cap. Front Jacking Location WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 327 4. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed. 6 Rear Jacking Location Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged. Jack Location 328 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! WARNING! Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. 5. Using the swivel wrench, raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right. Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability. 6. Remove the wheel bolts and pull the wheel off the hub. For vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels, the center caps must be removed to remove the wheel bolts. For vehicles equipped with steel wheels the wheel covers must be removed to remove the wheel bolts. CAUTION! Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly. WARNING! To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 329 7. Install the spare wheel and wheel bolts with the cone shaped end of the bolts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the bolts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the bolts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. 8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left. bag to the floor with the straps attached to the floor of the vehicle. WARNING! A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. 9. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until 11. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area. Have each bolt has been tightened twice. For the correct the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible. wheel bolt torque refer to Torque Specifications in this section. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have WARNING! them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealership or service station. A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard 10. Disassemble the jack and tools and place them in the stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have bag. Stow it under the driver’s seat and secure the the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately. 6 330 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 12. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct the tire pressure as required. Road Tire Installation Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. 2. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand. Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover. Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap 1 — Valve Stem 2 — Valve Notch 3 — Wheel Bolt 4 — Wheel Cover 5 — Road Wheel WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 331 3. Install the four wheel bolts with the cone shaped end 6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are bolts. properly seated against the wheel. WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel bolts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. 4. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 5. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for correct wheel bolt torque. Vehicles Without Wheel Covers 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. 2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts. WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. 6 332 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for correct wheel bolt torque. CAUTION! The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench or power tool may damage the winch. JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE 5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jumpwith a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in properly seated against the wheel. another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster Spare Tire Stowage pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. Reverse instructions of the spare removal section. Rotate the jack wrench tool on the winch drive nut NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, clockwise until effort becomes heavy and an audible click follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions. is heard indicating the spare is properly stowed. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 333 WARNING! Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury. CAUTION! Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur. Preparations For Jump-Start 6 Battery Posts The battery in your vehicle is located between the left 1 — Positive (+) Post (Covered With Protective Cap) front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash 2 — Negative (-) Post shield. 334 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! • Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades. • Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured. • Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery. 1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK. 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories. 3. Remove the protective cover over the positive (+) battery post. To remove the cover, press the locking tab and pull upward on the cover. 4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. WARNING! Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 335 Jump-Starting Procedure WARNING! Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion. CAUTION! Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle. Connecting The Jumper Cables 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. 3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery. 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and the fuel injection system. 6 WARNING! Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal parts. 336 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle, battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then you should have the battery and charging system instart the engine in the vehicle with the discharged spected at your authorized dealer. battery. 6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence: Disconnecting The Jumper Cables 1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the engine ground (-) of the vehicle with the discharged battery. 2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery. CAUTION! Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE 3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the 4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 337 and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or 2nd gear and REVERSE (with manual transmission), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels, or racing the engine. NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode. CAUTION! CAUTION! Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle. • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result. • Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring). 6 338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever: 1. Turn the engine OFF. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. 3. Remove the shift lever override access cover (located on the right side of the shift lever housing) by prying at the bottom edge of the cover. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 339 4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool into the access hole, and push and hold the override release lever in. 6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position. 7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL. 8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover. 6 Shift Lever Override Access Hole 340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service. Towing Condition Flat Tow Wheel Lift Flatbed Wheels OFF The Ground NONE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NOT ALLOWED Rear Front ALL NOT ALLOWED OK BEST METHOD MANUAL TRANSMISSION If transmission is operable: • Transmission in NEUTRAL • 65 mph (104 km/h) max speed NOT ALLOWED OK BEST METHOD WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341 Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent CAUTION! (Continued) damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other • Towing this vehicle in violation of the above reequipment designed for this purpose, following equipquirements can cause severe transmission damage. ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is Damage from improper towing is not covered unmandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding Automatic Transmission vehicles under tow must be observed. • Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated. If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN • Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off position. the ground). CAUTION! • DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain will result. If these vehicles require towing, make sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground. (Continued) If the ignition key is unavailable, or the battery is discharged, see “Shift Lever Override” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK for towing. 6 342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION! CAUTION! • DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain will result. • Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe engine and/or transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if the communication network remains intact, and the Manual Transmission power remains intact, depending on the nature of the • Vehicle can be flat towed (all four wheels on the event the ORC will determine whether to have the ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL. Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow• Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated. ing functions: • Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off • Cut off fuel to the engine. the ground). WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 343 • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or System Reset Procedure until the ignition key is turned off. After an impact causing airbag deployment, the left and • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel the battery has power or until the ignition key is cluster, will both be blinking, until the ignition is turned removed. off. • Unlock the doors automatically. After the event occurs, when the system is active, the message ⬙Fuel Cutoff See Handbook⬙ is displayed. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road you must follow the system reset procedure. 6 344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Customer Action 1. Turn ignition OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State). 2. Turn ignition ON. 3. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON. 4. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON. 5. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON. Customer Will See Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light BLINKS. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light BLINKS. Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light BLINKS. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light BLINKS. 6. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON. 7. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State). 8. Turn ignition OFF. Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light is OFF. System is now reset and the engine may be started. 9. Turn Hazard Flashers OFF (Manually). If a reset procedure step is not completed within 45 seconds, then the turn signal lights will turn off and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to be successful. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L . . . . . . . . . .347 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO . . . .348 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .349 ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 ▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .352 ▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 ▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 ▫ Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 ▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 ▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 ▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 ▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 ▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .378 7 346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .378 ▫ Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 ▫ Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime Running Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 ▫ Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 ▫ Convertible Top Care – If Equipped . . . . . . . .386 ▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . .397 䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 ▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 ▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 ▫ Underhood Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 ▫ Headlamps Low Beam and High Beam . . . . . .396 ▫ Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL). . .398 䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS . .400 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L 7 1 2 3 4 — — — — Engine Coolant Reservoir Engine Oil Dipstick Brake Fluid Reservoir Front Distribution Unit (Fuses) 5 6 7 8 — Battery — Air Cleaner Filter — Engine Oil Fill — Washer Fluid Reservoir 348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO 1 2 3 4 — — — — Engine Coolant Reservoir Engine Oil Dipstick Brake Fluid Reservoir Front Distribution Unit (Fuses) 5 — Battery 6 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations. If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. CAUTION! • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed. • If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. 7 350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to For states that require an Inspection and Maintestart this test over. nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part system is ready for testing. of a normal bulb check. Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently happen: serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if not proceed to the I/M station. your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the • The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully following: illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. not crank or start the engine. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351 If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready. use of parts which are not quality-equivalent to genuine parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty. DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself. Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control running. systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you. REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the 7 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! CAUTION! You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. • Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs, damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center. • Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine, transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle. Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule, there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353 Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground, and about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off, will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick. The safe range is indicated by a crosshatch zone. Adding 1 qt (1L) of oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range. CAUTION! Do not overfill the engine with oil. Overfilling the engine with oil will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This loss of oil pressure and increased oil temperature could damage your engine. Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further information. NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months, whichever occurs first. 7 354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Engine Oil Selection — 1.4L Engine American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil For best performance and maximum protection under all Identification Symbol types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only This symbol means that the oil has recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet been certified by the American the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Petroleum Institute (API). The Engine Oil Selection — 1.4L Turbo Engine manufacturer only recommends For best performance and maximum protection under all API Certified engine oils. types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS12991. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355 Engine Oil Viscosity — 1.4L Engine (SAE Grade) Engine Oil Viscosity — 1.4L Turbo Engine (SAE SAE 5W-30 engine oil recommended for all operating Grade) temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature SAE 5W-40 full synthetic engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low starting and vehicle fuel economy. temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom- Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certimended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used. are followed. Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi- The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartber should not be used. ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informaThe engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended tion. engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. 7 356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recomyour area. mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes Engine Oil Filter are followed. The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter Materials Added To Engine Oil at every engine oil change. Synthetic Engine Oils The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are high quality oil Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and filters and are recommended. oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, Engine Air Cleaner Filter indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service maintenance intervals. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357 WARNING! The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended. Maintenance-Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required. WARNING! • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. (Continued) 7 358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. • Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. • The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type (vented). • It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. • If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359 Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING! (Continued) For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time. • The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician. WARNING! CAUTION! • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, for further warranty information. Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. (Continued) Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If Equipped R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental 7 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How- NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants. service be performed by authorized dealer or other A/C Air Filter service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants. Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf — If Equipped WARNING! Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result. The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet on the HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrolower right of center console. Perform the following fluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmenprocedure to replace the filter: tal Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, 1. Remove the Torx® screw that secures the passenger side console closeout cover. the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 7 Torx® Screw Location Console Closeout Panel 2. Pull the console closeout cover rearward to disengage 3. Remove the two 5.5 mm screws (1 and 2) that secure the front retaining tab and remove the cover. the particulate air filter cover to the HVAC housing. 362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Air Filter Cover Screw Locations A/C Air Filter 4. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of 5. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position the housing. Take note of the air filter position indicaindicators pointing in the same direction as removal. tors. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 CAUTION! The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often. should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR® maintenance intervals. Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. 6. Install the passenger side console closeout. Body Lubrication Wiper Blades Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and help reduce streaking and smearing. 7 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use 1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the from a dry windshield or rear window. liftgate glass. Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield or rear window. Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary. 1 — Wiper Arm 2 — Pivot Cap MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully upward unless the pivot cap is raised first. 2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade off of the liftgate glass. 3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade holder. 7 1 2 3 4 — — — — Wiper Blade Blade Pivot Pin Wiper Arm Wiper Blade Holder 4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press the wiper blade until it snaps into place. 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into Exhaust System place. The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust Adding Washer Fluid system. The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment, and the fluid level should be If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with wind- or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; shield washer solvent (not engine coolant/ antifreeze). or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; Refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damVehicle” for further information. aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep WARNING! into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the Commercially available windshield washer solvents exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 WARNING! CAUTION! • Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. • A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn. • The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine. • Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle. 7 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damverter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age: portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in damage. motion. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the systems can result in civil penalties being assessed vehicle. against you. • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop idle or malfunctioning operating conditions. the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 Coolant Checks Cooling System WARNING! • When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position. • You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot. Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser. Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS12106). 7 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer. Selection Of Coolant Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. CAUTION! • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. (Continued) MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 CAUTION! (Continued) • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. • This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended. you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): • We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106. • Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material StanYour vehicle has been built with an improved engine dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concencoolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated. ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc- • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deioning this extended maintenance period, it is important that ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant Adding Coolant 7 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water • Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recomwill reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the mended and can result in cooling system damage. If engine cooling system. HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainOAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as tain the proper level of protection against freezing acpossible. cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where Cooling System Pressure Cap the vehicle is operated. The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze) and to ensure that engine coolant • Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could recovery tank. lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. local authorized dealer. NOTE: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 WARNING! • The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure. • Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result. rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately. Coolant Level The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the bottom and top lines marked “COLD FILL RANGE”. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is month. a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant 7 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to • Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antimaintain the proper level, it should be added to the freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant coolant bottle. Do not overfill. expansion bottle must also be protected against freezPoints To Remember ing. NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming required, the cooling system should be pressure tested from the front of the engine compartment. This is norfor leaks. mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor- • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MSized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine 12106) and distilled water for proper corrosion proteccoolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator. tion of your engine which contains aluminum compoIf an examination of your engine compartment shows no nents. evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. hoses are not kinked or obstructed. • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions. WARNING! (Continued) high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. Riding the brakes may also reduce braking capacity in an emergency. Brake Master Cylinder Brake System The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked In order to assure brake system performance, all brake when performing under hood services, or immediately if system components should be inspected periodically. the “Brake Warning Light” is on. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before maintenance intervals. removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake WARNING! fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed. (Continued) 7 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both the brake system and the clutch release system. The two systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in one system will not affect the other system. The manual transmission clutch release system should not require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See your local authorized dealer for service. Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. WARNING! • Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. (Continued) MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision. • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. • Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision. CAUTION! Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the transmission. 7 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Manual Transmission — If Equipped Lubricant Selection NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be changed immediately. Automatic Transmission — If Equipped Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in Selection Of Lubricant “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to Fluid Level Check ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this point not more than 3/16 in (4.7 mm) below the bottom section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the of the hole. recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used. Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubricant has become contaminated with water. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 CAUTION! CAUTION! Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications. Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Fluid Level Check Special Additives The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not The manufacturer strongly recommends against using require adjustment under normal operating conditions. any special additives in the transmission. Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered check your transmission fluid level using special service product and its performance may be impaired by suppletools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfuncmental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addition, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have tives to the transmission. The only exception to this the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vepolicy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid hicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may transmission damage. adversely affect seals. 7 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately. Fluid And Filter Changes Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle. Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason. passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection. The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle. What Causes Corrosion? Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion The most common causes are: • Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads • Stone and gravel impact. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 • Insects, tree sap and tar. • Salt in the air near seacoast localities. • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. Washing CAUTION! • Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces. • Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water. Special Care • If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once and Tar Remover to remove. a month. • Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR® Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint. open. • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. 7 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, Wheel And Wheel Trim Care touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is • All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and considered the responsibility of the owner. chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly • If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, • To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner. cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner. NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor • If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New packaged and sealed. Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis mud or stone shields behind each wheel. this is all that is required to maintain this finish. • Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 CAUTION! Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If Equipped • For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. • For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. • Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products. Interior Care Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- carpeting. ner: Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for with a clean, dry towel. leather upholstery. • Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel. 7 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition. WARNING! Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. CAUTION! Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as damage to the seat may result. Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing. Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements. Instrument Panel Bezels CAUTION! When installing hanging air fresheners in your vehicle, read the installation instructions carefully. Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any surface. Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care directly on the mirror. must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. Instrument Panel Cover 1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp protectants or other products which may cause undesirrag. able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the 2. Dry with a soft cloth. low glare surface. 7 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth. Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly. WARNING! A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). Convertible Top Care – If Equipped NOTE: Lubricate the top rails with Berulub FR 43 every 2000 cycles or if scratching noises due to dust are present. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mildew on the top material: • Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force past the weather strips. • Remove any standing water from the top and dry the surface before opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicles interior. • Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure directed at the weather strip seals may cause water to leak into the vehicles interior. appearance, and make successive cleanings easier. Do not subject the top to excessive heat. Frequently vacuum the top and storage compartment. Washing Hand washing is highly recommended. Automatic car washing equipment can damage the top material. If you must use an automatic car wash, soft cloth systems are preferred. CAUTION! Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force water past the weather strips. General Cleaning Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended. Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful in removing dust and other foreign particles. Wash in partial shade instead of direct sun. Wet the entire vehicle 7 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE before washing the top. The top should be washed with a soft, natural bristle scrub brush, and a mild soap solution such as liquid dishwashing soap. Do not use detergent. CAUTION! Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches. Cleaners should not contain silicones, organic solvents, petroleum distillates, or plasticizers. Always wait until the top is thoroughly dry before lowering it into the storage area. Scrub in all directions, covering an area of about two square feet at a time. Avoid heavy scrubbing. Rinse the entire vehicle with water to remove all soap and dirt from the top fabric and to prevent streaking on painted and chrome surfaces. Allow the top to dry before lowering. Vacuuming the top with a wet/dry shop vacuum will decrease the top’s drying time, ensure removal of all dirt, and delete streaks in the material. Multiple cleanings may be necessary to remove stubborn stains. If stains persist, contact your local authorized dealer for further suggestions. FUSES WARNING! • When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage. (Continued) MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 WARNING! (Continued) • Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged. • If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer. • If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer. Interior Fuses The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control Module (BCM) and is located on the driver’s side under the instrument panel. 7 Fuse Panel 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity 1 2 Vehicle Fuse Number F12 F32 Mini Fuse 7.5 Amp Brown 5 Amp Tan 3 4 5 F53 F38 F36 5 Amp Tan 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red 6 7 8 9 10 F43 F48 F13 F50 F51 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 7.5 Amp Brown 7.5 Amp Brown 5 Amp Tan 11 F37 5 Amp Tan Description Right Low Beam Front and Rear Ceiling Lights Trunk and Door Courtesy Lights Instrument Panel Node Central Door Locking Diagnostic Socket, Car Radio, Climate Control System Bi-Directional Washer Passenger Power Window Left Low Beam, Headlamp Leveling Airbag Car Radio Switch, Climate Control System, Stop Light, Clutch Stop Light Switch, Instrument Panel Node MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 Cavity 12 Vehicle Fuse Number F49 Mini Fuse 5 Amp Tan 13 14 F31 F47 5 Amp Tan 20 Amp Yellow Description Exterior Mirror, GPS, Electric Mirror, Parking Sensor Ignition, Climate Control Driver Power Window Underhood Fuses The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right side of the engine compartment, next to the battery. To access the fuses, press the release tabs and remove the cover. 7 Front Distribution Unit 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE The ID number of the electrical component corresponding to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover. Cavity F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 Maxi Fuse 60 Amp Blue 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 40 Amp Orange 70 Amp Tan 20 Amp Yellow 30 Amp Green 40 Amp Orange 40 Amp Orange Mini Fuse 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 15 Amp Blue Description Body Controller Audio Amplifier Ignition Switch Anti-Lock Brake Pump Electric Power Steering Radiator Fan - Single Speed Radiator Fan - Low Speed Radiator Fan - High Speed Blower Motor Powertrain Horn Powertrain MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 Cavity F11 F14 F15 F16 F17 F17 F18 F18 F19 F20 F21 F22 F23 F24 F30 Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse 10 Amp Red 5 Amp Tan 15 Amp Blue 7.5 Amp Brown 25 Amp White 15 Amp Blue 15 Amp Blue 5 Amp Tan 7.5 Amp Brown 15 Amp Blue 15 Amp Blue 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 7.5 Amp Brown 15 Amp Blue Description Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped) High Beam (Shutter) Cigar Lighter Transmission Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped) Powertrain Powertrain Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped) Air Conditioning Heated Seats – If Equipped Fuel Pump Powertrain Anti-Lock Brake Valves Stability Control System Fog Lamps 7 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity F82 F83 F84 F85 F87 F90 Maxi Fuse 30 Amp Green 20 Amp Yellow Mini Fuse 10 Amp Red 30 Amp Green (ATO) 5 Amp Tan 5 Amp Tan Description Sunroof/Convertible Top Cooling Pump – If Equipped Transmission Rear Defroster Rear Defroster Heated Mirrors – If Equipped • Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes days, you may want to take these steps to protect your in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will battery. ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the • Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. VEHICLE STORAGE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Bulbs Overhead Lamp Courtesy Lamp Bulb Number C5W W5W Exterior Bulbs Front Low and High Beam Headlamp Front Parking/Daytime Running Lamps Front Fog Lamps Front Side Marker Lamps Front Turn Signal Lamps Bulb Number HIR2 W21/5W H11 W3W WY21W Side Direction Lamps Rear Turn Signal Lamps Rear Side Marker Lamps Rear Tail and Stop Lamps Rear Backup Lamps Center High Mounted Stop Lamp License Plate Lamps Bulb Number WY5W PY21W W3W P21/5W W16W W5W LED (See Authorized dealer) NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual. 7 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BULB REPLACEMENT Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime Running Lamps NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric 1. Turn the steering wheel completely to the left or right. conditions change to allow the condensation to change 2. Open the wheel housing access door. back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process. Headlamps Low Beam and High Beam 1. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the headlamp housing. 2. Rotate the bulb counter-clockwise. 3. Remove the bulb and replace as needed. 4. Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in place. 5. Reinstall the plastic cap. Wheel Housing Access Door MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 3. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the lamp housing. 2. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise, and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the housing. 4. Rotate bulb/socket counter-clockwise. 3. Pull the bulb from the socket and insert the replacement bulb. 5. Remove the bulb and replace as needed. 6. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket clockwise into lamp locking it in place. 7. Reinstall the plastic cap. Front Fog Lamps 4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing, and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place. 5. Reinstall the wheel liner. Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps To replace the front fog lights, see your authorized dealer. 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the two screws and remove the tail lamp Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps assembly. 1. Remove portion of the wheel liner to allow hand access to side marker lamp. 7 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 5. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out. 6. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp. Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 1. Remove the two guard caps and the two fastening screws. 2. Remove the center high mounted stop lamp assembly. 3. Disconnect the electric connector. 4. Press the retaining device and open the bulb holder. Tail Lamp Assembly Screws 5. Remove the snap-fitted bulb to be replaced and replace it. 3. Remove four screws and separate the backplate from the lamp housing. 6. Close the back cap locking it properly. 4. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by pushing 7. Reinstall the two fastening screws and reinstall the them slightly and turning counter-clockwise. guard caps. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 FLUID CAPACITIES Fuel (Approximate) Engine Oil with Filter 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine Cooling System 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula) — with Manual Transmission 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula) — with Automatic Transmission U.S. 10.5 Gallons Metric 40 Liters 4 Quarts 3.8 Liters 4.6 Quarts 4.4 Liters 5.8 Quarts 5.5 Liters 7 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Engine Coolant - 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine Engine Oil - 1.4L Engine Engine Oil - 1.4L Turbo Engine Engine Oil Filter - 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106. We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. Use API Certified SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12991. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. We recommend you use a MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 Component Spark Plugs - 1.4L Engine Spark Plugs - 1.4L Turbo Engine Fuel Selection - 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs 87 Octane Acceptable — 91 Octane Recommended Chassis Component Manual Transmission – If Equipped Automatic Transmission – If Equipped Brake Master Cylinder Convertible Top Rails Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part We recommend you use MOPAR® C635 DDCT/MTX Transmission Fluid Use only MOPAR® AW-1 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. We recommend you use Berulub FR 43. 7 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS 䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 ▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 8 404 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km). Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months, whichever comes first. Severe Duty All Models Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 405 Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: • Check engine oil level. • Check windshield washer fluid level. • Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage. • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and brake master cylinder, and fill as needed. • Check function of all interior and exterior lights. Required Maintenance Intervals. Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page for the required maintenance intervals. At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System: • Change oil and filter. • Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on. • Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required. • Inspect brake pads, rotors, and hoses. • Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses. • Check and adjust hand brake. • Inspect exhaust system. • Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions. 8 406 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Maintenance Chart Additional Inspections Inspect the CV joints. Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, and replace if necessary. Inspect the brake linings. Replace as necessary. 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Or Years: Or Kilometers: 20,000 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 32,000 Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Inspect parking brake function. Adjust as necessary. Additional Maintenance Replace engine air filter. Replace cabin air filter. Clean and lube sun roof tracks. Replace spark plugs (1.4L Engine). ** Replace spark plugs (1.4L Turbo Engine). ** 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Or Years: Or Kilometers: 20,000 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 32,000 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 407 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 8 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Or Years: Or Kilometers: 20,000 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 32,000 408 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first. Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. Replace the timing belt. ** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply. X X X X MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 409 WARNING! • You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. • Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident. 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS 䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .415 ▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .412 ▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .415 ▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 ▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 ▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .416 䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM ▫ FIAT CUSTOMER CENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 ▫ FIAT CANADA CUSTOMER CENTER . . . . . .413 ▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418 ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 ▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 9 412 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment. If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE current problem. The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally Prepare A List interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services. specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an service advisor know. authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 413 facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) correctly and in a timely manner. • Vehicle delivery date and mileage This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- FIAT CUSTOMER CENTER solved with this process. P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Phone: • If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the 1–800–423–6343 general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. FIAT CANADA CUSTOMER CENTER They want to know if you need assistance. P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: 1–800– • If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- 465–2001 (English) Phone: 1–800–387–9983 (French) cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech center. Impaired (TDD/TTY) Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenTo assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the ter should include the following information: manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni• Owner’s name and address cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer • Owner’s telephone number (home and office) center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter 9 414 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French). manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY. The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer’s New Service Contract Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents. repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited We appreciate that you have made a major investment Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related have any questions about the service contract, call the concerns. manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 415 WARNING! Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy WARRANTY INFORMATION campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the individual problems between you, your authorized DVD, for the terms and provisions of FIAT Group dealer, and the manufacturer. Automobiles warranties applicable to this vehicle and market. 9 416 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http:// www.safercar.gov. In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety/ PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form. NOTE: A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes). Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FIAT Group Automobiles vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 417 Diagnostic Procedure Manuals • Call toll free at: Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment. 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) Owner’s Manuals These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FIAT Group Automobiles vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips. 1–800–387–1143 (Canada) Or • Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: www.techauthority.com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle. 9 418 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety Traction Grades requirements in addition to these grades. The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on Treadwear wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforconditions on a specified government test course. For mance. example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 419 WARNING! The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law. WARNING! The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. 9 INDEX 10 422 INDEX Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .371 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .356 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Automatic Dimming Mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .209 Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 INDEX 423 Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .18 Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401 Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . .399 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 Caps, Filler Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 Change Oil Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .151 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 10 424 INDEX Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Child Restraints Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint . . . . .68 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .64 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Cleaning Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 Connector UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . .203 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convertible Top Maintenance . . . . . Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 .386 .399 .369 .371 .369 .373 .369 .373 .372 .372 .370 .380 .148 .136 .412 Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 INDEX 425 Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Disposal Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Electric Remote Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .120 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .158 Exit Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 New Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 Start Of Trip Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Emergency, In Case of Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .349 Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 10 426 INDEX Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Filters Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Flashers Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Euro Twin Clutch Transmission Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378 Fluid Level Checks Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .400 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 INDEX 427 Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Cutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . Gasoline, Reformulated . . . Gauges Coolant Temperature . . . Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . Gear Select Lever Override General Information . . . . . General Maintenance. . . . . Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 .157 .156 .157 .233 .338 .292 .352 .385 Hazard Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 10 428 INDEX Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Heated Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 .320 .319 .332 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . Key, Replacement . . . . . . Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jacking Instructions . Jack Location . . . . . Jack Operation . . . . Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 .14 .11 .13 Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 INDEX 429 Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .151 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 Wait to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .146 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Loading Vehicle Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Locks Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .151 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 10 430 INDEX Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .151 Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378 Frequency of Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378 Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378 Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 Media Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 INDEX 431 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .133 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Pretensioners Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .265 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 Rear Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 10 432 INDEX Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Seat Belts (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Power Convertible Top Function . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .204 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 INDEX 433 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 SENTRY KEY® FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .151 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 Shift Speeds, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Steering Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .204 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .39 10 434 INDEX Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .209 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . .264 TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 .264 .283 .149 .417 .272 .279 .282 .257 .259 .273 .277 .277 .257 .109 .299 .340 .300 .300 INDEX 435 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Transaxle Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .18 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 .417 .203 .293 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Vehicle Vehicle Vehicle Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265 Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 Wait to Start Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .146 Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Washer Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 Water Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 10 436 INDEX Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation. The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be fused. Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped. The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable. Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions. All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic systems. 2014 FIAT 500 2014 OWNER’S MANUAL Chrysler Group LLC 14FF500-126-AC Third Edition Rev 1 Printed in U.S.A. FIAT 500